JP6669793B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

Conventionally , there has been a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on the set set values. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value, the processing can be shifted to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-200902 A

However, in the case of a gaming machine such as that disclosed in Patent Document 1, in a situation where the user wants to confirm the settings immediately, the user must wait until all the processes being performed are completed. Did not.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing a setting check operation .

In order to solve the above problems, Yu technique machine of the present invention,
A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player when a specific display result is derived,
Setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player;
State control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set,
Normal variable display means for performing variable display of normal identification information and deriving a display result based on that the game medium has passed the predetermined area,
Ordinary variable display timing means for timing the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information,
The ordinary variable display timer means, when controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the ordinary identification information, stops timing of the period until the setting confirmation state ends. When the setting confirmation state ends, the timing of the period is restarted.
According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and in the setting confirmation state, the variable display of the normal identification information is executed and the game progresses, thereby causing a disadvantage to the player. Can be prevented, and the setting check operation can be suitably performed.

  It should be noted that the present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, and may have a configuration other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is a figure for explaining a fluctuation pattern and a kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of notice effect determination processing. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure showing a game information display part. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every big hit type in a special symbol display device. It is a figure which shows the shift aspect of a 1st hold display and a 2nd hold display. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every big hit type in a round display. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates the production control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various big hits. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B and big hit C), (C) FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern for loss. (A) is a front view of the display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. 5 is a time chart showing a display time of an item displayed on a display monitor. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a change in display content of a display monitor. It is a flowchart showing a game control main process. (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clearing process, and (B) is a schematic diagram of a RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a figure showing change of a display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor at the time of a cold start, and (B) is a view showing a display mode of a display monitor when a set value abnormal error occurs or when the power is restored from a power cut during a setting change. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode of a special symbol display device, a hold display device, a right-handed lamp, and a round display device during execution of the setting change process, and (B) is a diagram when a set value abnormality error occurs, or It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of the special symbol display device when it recovers from the power interruption during the setting change. It is a figure showing a part of timer interrupt for game control. It is a flow chart which shows production control main processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing information stored in a RAM and a cleared state. It is an explanatory view showing an initial symbol for each received command. It is an explanatory view showing a notification mode at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example at the time of non-detection operation control and operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a figure which shows the operation speed in operation | movement of the operation control at the time of non-detection, and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. 6 is a timing chart showing a relationship between a change of a set value and a confirmation end timing of the set value, and a number of executions of a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process. It is a figure showing the display mode of an image display device. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of effect control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value change process in the characteristic part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value confirmation process in the characteristic part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop start process in the characteristic part 10F. It is a flow chart which shows game stop ending processing in feature part 10F.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device and driven into the game area.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of kinds of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing are provided. These are each composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a numeral indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of a special symbol means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed so as to be variable (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. On the image display device 5, various effect images are displayed.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern indicating a number or the like). Is variably displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down). (Scroll display of direction and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol executed synchronously is also simply referred to as a variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays suspended is also referred to as the number of suspended storages. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved storage number. In addition, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, there are provided a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs. Displays the first number of reserved storages, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second number of reserved storages based on the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port that is always kept in a fixed open state by which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting prize port that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is Is in the closed state where the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is on (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. It should be noted that the variable winning ball device 6B only needs to change between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to be opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and a special winning opening as a specific area that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball becomes large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is on, the special winning opening door opens the large winning opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special winning opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays a normal symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called a normal symbol game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a pass gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the general-purpose game is executed.

  Above the ordinary symbol display 20, there is provided an ordinary symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games for which execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  Loudspeakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for a gaming effect is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which a prize ball is paid out when the upper plate is full is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation or the like) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
A game ball is fired toward a game area by a rotation operation by a player on a hit ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol display device 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general-purpose game based on the passage). The general-purpose game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (regular symbol lost symbol) other than the symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol is “regular symbol lost”. When "per day" is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  Note that, when the game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during a period in which the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state, which will be described later. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, “7”, an actual symbol is different depending on the type of big hit described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, the big hit symbol is obtained. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, “2”) different from the above is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the state is controlled to the small hit game state.

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

  Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special winning opening (the number of rounds and the upper limit period of opening) and a game state after the big hit game state (a normal state, a time saving state, a probable change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared. The type has been set. As the big hit type, a big hit type where many prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type where few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hitting game state, the opening mode is the same as the big hitting game state in the case of some of the big hit types (the number of opening of the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same). Etc.) to open the big winning opening. In addition, similarly to the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit game state is ended, the time may be controlled to a time saving state or a certain change state depending on the big hit type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure fluctuation time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is performed as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average time of fluctuating fluctuating time (period of fluctuating fluctuating figure) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "per-figure hit" in the frug drawing game is improved than in the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that allow the game balls to easily enter the second start winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, and is therefore an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than that in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the state is likely to be a “big hit”.

  The time saving state and the probable change state continue until one of the end conditions such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. The condition that the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times is an end condition is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time-saving state, a probable change state, or the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special map game will be a "big hit", is set in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed). This is a state in which the same control is performed as when the processing is not executed).

  The state in which the probable change control is being executed is also referred to as a high-probability state, and the state in which the probable change control is not being executed is referred to as a low-probability state. The state in which the time-saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time-saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the probable change state is a high-precision high-base state, and the normal state is also a low-probability low-base state. The high-accuracy low-base state is also referred to as a high-accuracy low-base state.

  After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to have “small hit”.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. Note that the effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, a sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 is provided. May be performed by turning on / off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 as the effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also stopped (derived).

  During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described below. Is continued.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also referred to as a jackpot reliability or a jackpot expectation) in which a display result (a display result of a special figure game or a display result of a variable display of a decorative pattern) becomes a "big hit" according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of "probable change big hit" which is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state is ended, the probable change state is set. In the case of a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot) that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After the non-probable design has reached the reach mode, a promotion effect that eventually becomes a “probable change” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach combination fixed decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “non-reach loss”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative design variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach loss”) is displayed as the decorative symbol variable display display result. ) May be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "reach loss").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effects include a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display with execution suspended). As the prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Also, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

  During the big hit game state, a big hit effect is performed to notify the big hit game state. As the large hit production, a production that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. The big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By performing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting game state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

  Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), Game state, small hitting game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, , A random number circuit 104 and an input / output port (I / O) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, data to be referred to when making various determinations to be described later, and various tables) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation). An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general-purpose reservation display 25C, and the like (solenoid driving signal) is provided.

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass or exit) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start-up switch (first start-up switch 22A and second start-up switch 22B), count switch 23). (Such as a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle enters) and is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a special winning opening door. Transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, the effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12 The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), A game state (for example, start and end of variable display, opening state of a special winning opening, occurrence of a prize, number of storages held, game state), a command for specifying an error occurrence, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various types of notification such as driving of the movable body 32, notification of an error, and notification of restoration of a power failure).

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and Determination, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content). In some cases, the control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 displays an effect image on the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating a lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs a sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

  The lamp control board 14 includes various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. I do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the turning on / off of the lamp.

  The sound output, control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) are executed by the effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for inputting an effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 or the like, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port.

  Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the voice control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of the main board 11)
First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a restoration process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the game state is restored, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, the effect control command to specify the backed-up game state before the power interruption, or the effect control to specify the display result of the running special figure game if the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed or that the restoration from the power interruption is being performed. Screen display to perform The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12 after ending the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a register of a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether a detection signal has been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, big hit information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big hits) and start information (start information) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the state has changed to a certain probability) are output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random number used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process at each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized. See below).

  Subsequent to the special symbol processing, the ordinary symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupts, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the general symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), Opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per day" is enabled. The execution of the ordinary symbol game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C is turned on to display the ordinary symbol reservation number.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out award balls, and the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a command control process (Step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as a special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of stored holds is executed. When a winning start occurs, a random number for determining a display result (including a big hit type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of storages to be held, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating a determination result such as occurrence of a start winning prize, the number of storages to be held, and pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the winning start-up thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination processing in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processing in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S120), transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", or a big hit type in the case of "big hit" Is determined (prior determination) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (any of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special figure game is set in accordance with the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1”, and the special special pattern normal processing ends. Note that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in the order of the winning (also referred to as winning the order).

  When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting processing, any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is used by using a random number value for variation pattern determination based on a result of a predetermined determination as to whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. And the like are determined. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (the special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. Is designated (variable display pattern, etc.).

  The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. The special symbol change processing includes a process for setting a special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to change. And the like. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation reaches the special figure fluctuation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol fluctuation processing ends.

  The special symbol stop processing in step S113 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the change of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The processing for making the setting is included. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “losing”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. If the display result is "small hit" or "losing", the game state is updated when the time reduction state or the probable change state is controlled and the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit gaming state and setting a big winning opening to an open state based on a display result of “big hit” or the like. Have been. When opening the special winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an opening upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to, for example, the type of the big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit opening processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during the opening of the jackpot is based on a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the jackpot, and on the basis of the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. For determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing such as stopping supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the opening of the big hit ends.

  The post-big hit release processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The post-big hit opening process includes a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the special winning opening is opened has reached a set upper limit number of times, and a process of determining whether or not the number of hits has reached the upper limit number of times. And the like to perform a setting for terminating the process. When the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release processing ends.

  The big hit end processing in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The big hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state, and a change in response to the end of the big hit game state. The processing includes various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit release pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting the large winning opening to the open state in the small hitting game state based on the display result being “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit opening processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". The processing during opening of the small hits includes processing for measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and timing for returning the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When the big winning port is returned to the closed state and the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening processing ends.

  The small hit end processing in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed is performed. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operation of effect control board 12)
Next, main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be disabled. However, when a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, the interrupt is disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In the command reception interrupt processing, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt processing.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command that has been read is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. For example, it turns on a provided reception flag. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

  After executing the command analysis processing in step S75, an effect control process processing is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative illuminant such as a decoration LED, a movable body 32 The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of the device, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed on the control content of the rendering operation using the various rendering devices in accordance with the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process illustrated in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing a look-ahead notice effect are performed based on a start control effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of held memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether to start variable display of a decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether a command for designating the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11 or the like. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process ends.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative design variable display (fixed decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach Whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are to be executed, the mode thereof, the execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, and ends the variable display start setting process. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5 by instructing the display control unit 123. Driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and transmitting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects control such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by the output is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. After performing such an effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative symbol from the main board 11 is received. In response to, for example, the fixed decoration symbol which is the display result of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The wait process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6”. To ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the small hit effect effect processing. Also, if the reception wait time of the command has elapsed without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special map game is “losing”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the wait process per special figure ends.

  The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . In addition, in the small hit effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit production process ends.

  The small hit end effect processing in step S175 is processing executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and performs various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. Execute Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect process ends.

  The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In this big hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. In the big hit middle rendering process, the value of the rendering control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending rendering process in response to, for example, receiving a command designating the big hit gaming state from the main board 11. 7 ", and ends the big hit production process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the set contents. Execute. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of the basic description)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the gaming media is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button and the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.) are mounted.

  The programs and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium. It may be in a form of being distributed by being installed in a storage device included in the storage device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In this specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “differentiate”) is that one of the ratios is “0%”. May be included. For example, it may include that one is a ratio of “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8A is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern PA1-1, PA1 of the non-reach-losing pattern in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode and the display result is "losing". -2. The display results are "big hits" such as reach loss variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "losing". Are prepared. PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach AE are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that indicates that it is controlled to the big hit state. The reliability when each reach is executed (big hit reliability) is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1 (B). Normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach Reach B <Super Reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it becomes a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. In addition, during the super-reach reach effect, an advanced effect that evolves (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. shown in FIG. 8A are the fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 8A illustrates a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves to a super-reach one step higher, but a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of the reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability among the super reach is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and the other super reach is notified of the title by display and sound. As described above, the notification of the title is executed by the effect device of the reach with the higher reliability than the reach with the lower reliability. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively instigated, and the production effect can be improved. The notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the font of the title character (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and the typeface (line, square, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself, such as the name of the reach, but may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the content of the effect of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of a rendering operation according to the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super-reach effect production operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. ing. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number 7 on the “left” and “right” stops and the reach mode is reached. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8C, the character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses from the start of the super-reach effect, such as when the introduction part of the super-reach effect (also referred to as the super-reach effect) ends, as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 of super reach A (here, the character of "SP reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and the sound (here, "super reach A") corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8. Thus, the title of Super Reach A is announced. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is deleted, the character 31AK003, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK003 are displayed as shown in FIG. Is performed, the subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. An effect in which characters confront each other is also referred to as a battle effect. In the battle effect, if a friendly character wins, a big hit occurs, and if the friendly character loses, a loss occurs.

  In addition, when the words are displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the sound corresponding to the words may be output from the speaker 8. Also, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8E, and may be displayed as subtitles in a lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of Super Reach B, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super reach effect, such as when the introduction part of the super reach effect ends, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. (Here, “SP Reach B”) is displayed, and a sound (here, “Super Reach B”) corresponding to the Reach title name is output from the speaker 8, so that the Super Reach B title is displayed. Be informed. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 8G, the character 31AK006, which is the enemy character, is displayed. Is performed, the subsequent portion of the reach effect of the super reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction part of the super reach effect is shown to the player, and the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Also, super reach A (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And super reach B (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G)...) In the introduction part before the title is announced, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2 (C)). In this way, the player can be noticed which super-reach is to be made since the super-reach effect is started, and which title is to be notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to the completely common production mode until the title is announced. At least one super-reach can be determined by watching the production, for example. The sections may have a common effect mode. For example, in the introductory part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) may be executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. As described above, the title notification may be executed after the super reach can be specified.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character of “SP Reach D”) is displayed at a part of the center of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At the same time, a sound (here, “defeat the enemy”) corresponding to the title of the reach is output from the speaker 8, thereby notifying the title of the super reach D. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Under the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion indication 31AK008 indicating the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but does not have to completely match the big hit reliability of the reach.

  It should be noted that the notification by the voice of Super Reach D does not report the title as it is, but reports the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice differs depending on the type of the reach. Thereby, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is announced in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the expectation degree of the reach even during the reach effect. Although FIG. 8-2 (I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 8-2 (C) (super reach A, super reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D is executed. You may.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8J, the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is performed. Be executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 8A, the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character of “SP Reach E”) is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5. Then, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In the super reach E, the notification of the title by voice is not performed. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is the enemy character, are displayed. Be executed. As described above, in Super Reach E, the title is notified in accordance with the progress of the reach effect. In the super reach E, the title 31AK010 is continuously displayed during the reach effect.

  In the reach effect of the super reach E having a low jackpot reliability, by giving the title information without stopping the progress of the reach effect, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation. On the other hand, in the reach effects of the super reach A, the super reach B and the super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the super reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that in super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Also, in contrast to this embodiment, in a super-reach reach production with high jackpot reliability, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach effect of the super reach having a low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the super reach effect, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the super reach effect is provided. The title is announced at the start. By doing in this way, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the superreach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach have low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production, but the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production in the case of the reach with a high jackpot reliability, and the super The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. Is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing in this way, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, title notification is executed in a wider display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be such that the title is displayed in a size that fits on the entire screen, or the entire background is displayed as a title notification background. (Title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method for changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is made different according to the reach effect, the display area may be made different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be made different.

(Expectation suggestion indication)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in the super reach A and the super reach B having the high jackpot reliability, the super reach D having the lower jackpot reliability than the super reach A and the super reach B is displayed without displaying the indication of the expectation. In the title notification in, an indication of the degree of expectation was displayed. By doing so, the effect can be prevented from becoming dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, an indication of the degree of expectation is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach E.

  In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) and the like, and the expectation degree may be indicated by a meter or a gauge, or may be indicated. May be displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) and the like, in the case where the number of black stars is indicated, half (or half) black stars may be displayed, and the number of stages of the degree of expectation may be increased. .

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, it is possible to pay attention to the reach effect. In the super reach D and the super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until a later-described determined effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the type of the reach can be grasped even during the super reach effect. Further, by performing the above, the title notification corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in any case in order to improve the effect.

  Note that, here, the operation of the super-reach C in the reach effect is omitted, but it is only necessary to execute, for example, title notification and expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability.

(Decided production)
When it is time to derive the display result (the end of the variable display) after each reach effect has been executed, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result will be a "big hit" is executed. The fixed effects include a fixed effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a fixed effect indicating that the display result is “losing”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8B, a fixed effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is "big hit", an image 31AK013 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8C, and as shown in FIG. A definitive decorative symbol to be a big hit combination is derived. If the display result is "losing", an image indicating that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In the present embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the fixed effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and sharp title notification can be executed.

  In the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative design is reduced at the lower right portion of the image display device 5 and the variable display is executed. The way of displaying the decorative pattern during the reach effect may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  In addition, when the character display which is resident during the hold display, the active display, and the variable display, and the display related to the mobile communication are displayed on the image display device 5, the display is appropriately not displayed during the super-reach reach effect so as to focus on the reach effect. It may be. At this time, these displays may be kept displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting a low-reliability reach effect, and to pay attention to the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development stage)
Next, an example of an effect operation when the extended effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the advanced effect is executed when the reach effect of super reach D is executed (the title notification of super reach D is executed), FIG. As shown in (B), an effect in which the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. Thereafter, in the case of developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8C, the title of Super Reach A is announced, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. In the case of developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 8D, the title of Super Reach B is announced, and Reach production of Super Reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title information of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it is easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 8-4, when the reach of the development destination is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), but may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (indicating failure). It may be displayed. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. It should be noted that there may be a development effect of gasses, such as a performance in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 is configured to display a black star indicating the expectation degree from the beginning. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8A, when informing the title of Super Reach D, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the degree of expectation indication display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, a sound of “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed step by step each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted, as shown in FIG. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree suggestion effect has ended.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 8A to 8F, black stars are displayed one by one, and the degree of expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. One or more items may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more levels. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed, and the degree of expectation may be raised by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of displayed stars (the number of stages of rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the effect indicating the degree of expectation is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. The same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, and fits in the white star of the expectation indication display, and the number of black stars according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases increases Such an effect may be performed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif displayed on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speaker 8, and the like may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by a player's operation.

  FIGS. 8-5 (G) to (L) are examples of the production operation of title notification and expectation degree suggestion production when the special mode is set when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the production mode. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is a reach effect of the super reach D2 having a different effect form from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-5 (G). At this time, a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but a voice different from the normal mode (for example, a voice having a different voice color) is output. The expectation degree indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white diamonds of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound of “pong” indicating that the black diamond indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. When the number of black diamonds corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (L), the black rhombus is highlighted so as to shine. In this way, by making the notification mode of the title different depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the selection of the player, the game state, and the like, the effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. improves.

  FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the production operation when the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is specified. However, depending on the production mode (the state when the reach production is executed), another reach production (title notification, expectation degree) is performed. (Including a suggestion effect) may be made different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether to notify the title of the reach or the execution ratio of the title notification may be made different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, the effect according to the preference of the player can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the degree of expectation is indicated by the number of black stars in the degree of expectation indication display, and an expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is executed. May be executed in such a manner that the number of displays suggesting is gradually reduced. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to, or instead of, the expectation effect effect of the present embodiment.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, in the case where the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the title of Super Reach D is announced, and after the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, the image is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B). An extended effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the character of “SP Reach C”) is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C). , The title of Super Reach C is announced. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title information of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it is easy to understand which reach has been developed. Under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 having three black stars is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. Note that, after the movable body 32 operates, a development effect in which the title and the expected degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary production)
In this embodiment, a title announcement for announcing the jackpot reliability is executed as an announcement effect according to the title notification mode (for example, the title display color). For example, as shown in FIG. 8A, the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black, and a sound corresponding to the title name of Reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach A is displayed. Is notified, a title notice that the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B). As described above, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the display of the title.

  When a title notice in which the title display mode (display color) is changed is executed, after the title display mode has been changed, a sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The title notification by voice may be executed after the title display mode (display color) changes. In this case, a sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of an effect (specific effect) such as a notice effect or an advanced effect, in which the degree of expectation controlled in the jackpot advantageous state is improved. By doing in this way, once the title is announced, an effect of increasing the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect and an effect mode. The announcement effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super-reach fluctuation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If the pattern is a super-reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super-reach (whether or not to execute a title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined according to whether the display result is "big hit" or "losing", for example, at a determination ratio shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8A, the display color of the title of the super reach is changed from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and from “black” to “fruit pattern”. The ones that change and those that change from “red” to “fruit pattern” are provided, and the big hit reliability increases in this order (ascending order). In other words, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing at which the title display color changes. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  The “fruit pattern” may be such that the title character is displayed in bold and the character itself is a “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area may be a “fruit pattern”. . There may be a pattern displayed as a “fruit pattern” from the beginning. As for the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may be changed after the title notification is executed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. In addition, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes depending on the type of super reach may be made different. In the case of a super reach having a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided, and the changing timing may be determined to any one. In the case of a super reach having a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or a smaller number than a super reach having a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a different rate from the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and display color change timing) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the character display mode (for example, the display color of the line, etc.) in the super reach reach effect.

  After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the words of the character in the reach attainment of the super reach (whether or not to execute a speech notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (C) according to whether the display result is “big hit” or “losing”. As shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), the display colors of the dialogue in the reach effect include “white”, “red”, and those that change from “white” to “red”, in this order (ascending order). ) Has increased the jackpot reliability. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing at which the display color of the dialogue changes. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. In the case where the display color changes, the display color may change after the words are displayed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  In addition, the big hit reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the speech notice. For example, in the case where the same announcement mode (display color) is included in the title announcement and the dialogue announcement, the big hit reliability may be increased when the same announcement mode is achieved. In addition, the big hit reliability may be made different by a combination of the timing of change of the presentation mode between the title notice and the speech notice. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change occurs first. By doing so, it is possible to focus attention on the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialog may be determined at a different rate from the normal mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  Note that, in place of the dialogue announcement, an announcement effect for notifying the jackpot reliability based on a change in the effect mode of the reach effect may be executed. In this case, in the notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that the pattern is not a variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence or absence of other notice effects and the effect form are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (Step AK31S005), and the announcement effect determination process ends.

  Note that in this embodiment, the title advance notice and the dialogue advance notice can be executed in the case of the super reach, but in the case of the specific super reach (for example, other than the super reach with low reliability), the title advance notice is provided. And at least one of dialogue notices may be made executable. In addition, the title announcement and the dialogue of the dialogue have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9, but the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, even if the determination ratio is changed according to the type of super reach. Good. By doing so, a notice effect can be executed according to the type of the reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable effect modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing in this way, the effects can be varied and the effect of the effects can be enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing so, a notice effect with a sense of unity can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
When the presentation mode of the title notice and the dialogue of the dialogue change, an effect indicating that the presentation mode changes may be executed. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an effect effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the line may be changed. The effect mode of the action effect (action effect image and the like) may be common to both the title and the line. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change despite the execution of the action effect. In the case of executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the effect effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the speech notice changes in the effect mode (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect. The ratio of the effect of the speech notice and that of which effect mode changes (the ratio of the effect on which effect) may be different, or the ratio of the color (how many steps) the effect changes may be different. . By executing such an action effect, when the action effect image is displayed, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the line is to be applied, and the effect is improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence or absence of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect mode. By doing in this way, an action effect corresponding to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of one of a title and a line in accordance with the effect content of the reach effect (for example, an effect of a character or an effect in a battle effect). May be changed. In this way, the player pays attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, all of the features described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Here, it is referred to as a sub liquid crystal, but the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5 or the like, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and display of a hold display are executed. For example, title notification may be executed in the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, when the title is displayed continuously after the notification of the title, the display of the title and the degree of expectation may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after the image display device 5 notifies the title, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the expected degree suggestion display. By doing so, it is possible to display the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display without obstructing the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display are also easy to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of a title of a reach effect as a suggestive effect has been described. However, the present invention is applied to title information relating to other effects (notice of mainly displaying characters). You may. For example, as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), when performing a look-ahead zone effect of shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, and the like) in which the background image and the effect mode on the image display device 5 are different, the shifted zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When a mission ("Let's reach at 7", "Eliminate enemies using a stick controller", etc.) is presented, and a mission effect that is in a state advantageous to the player when the mission is completed is executed, The present invention may be applied to title notification of a mission.

(Modified Example 31AK-1 of Characteristic Part 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, the determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and thereafter, the display result is displayed ( FIG. 8-3 (B)-(D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving a display result, an operation effect prompting operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the winning or losing of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

  FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super reach effect operation in the modification 31AK-1 in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is displayed according to the operation. After reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), for example, as shown in FIG. 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 8-11 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C). Thereby, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification 31AK-1, a plurality of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is to be executed are prepared. The big hit reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode having higher reliability.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. It changes to the large button image 31AK047.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (I), an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in the modification 31AK-1, when the operation effect image changes, an effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without accompanying the effect effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may be different depending on the type of the effect effect.

  Thereafter, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J), the regulation line 31AK044 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (K), the stick image 31AK051 is moved to the center part. Is displayed, and a display urging the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. At this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (M), a fixed decoration symbol which is a big hit combination is derived. If an operation is not detected within a predetermined operation validity period, an image shown in FIG. 8-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In the modification 31AK-1, the operation effect images include a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image, and the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The reliability of the big hit in the case of being done is high. Even when an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, the operation effect image may change to a reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved and the expectation of the player is improved. Can be maintained.

  8-10 and 8-11, the notification of the title of the reach and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted, but the reach effect shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 is omitted. Or may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination of the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether or not there is an operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, whether or not there is an effect effect) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG.

(Modified Example 31AK-2 of Characteristic Part 31AK)
A suggestion indicating the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state may be displayed. For example, a shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and a reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display after the start of the variable display is executed. In the reach title effect, after the reach, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating a development destination of the reach effect is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image having a high jackpot reliability and displayed with a plurality of types of elements included in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when a reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, when a fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <a blue image <a red image <a fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title of red characters). Then, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When the shutter display and the reach title display are performed, even when a fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and notifies the game effect lamp 9 by emitting light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such a shutter display and a reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 8-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8A, when the shutter effect is performed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is performed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is performed, and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is performed. When the shutter that has been closed is opened, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. Downward arrows indicate variable display of left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8D, the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, at the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed at the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 31AK062 is displayed, and the contents of the super reach to be executed are shown as reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "Battle Reach" indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is performed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after the common sound is output, an effect is performed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the hit reliability is high, such as "hot hot". Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than in the shutter effect. However, as described above, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. In addition, although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the character "BATTLE WIN!" Is displayed at the upper left of the screen. It is announced that the jackpot has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect ends, the display returns to the variable display screen using the original numeric symbols. As shown in FIG. 8F, all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. This makes it possible to suitably display the fruit pattern image in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thus, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d). Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  The shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8D are displayed at different timings. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to the overlapping of the execution timings.

  The determination regarding the shutter effect (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) may be performed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 8-8. In that case, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 in FIG. 8-8. For example, when it is determined that the display color of the title is a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Also, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 8-8 together with the determination regarding the shutter effect.

(Explanation on the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-7, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board (gauge) constituting a gaming board surface. Board) 2 and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 207 SG003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting and firing device and is hit into the game area. In the gaming machine frame 207SG003, a glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window is positioned between a door opening position for opening the front surface of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 centering on the left side and a door closing position for closing the front surface. The game area is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 207SG003a. When the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

  Further, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a clerk or the like of a game arcade into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. The door frame 207SG003a cannot be opened.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the left side of the image display device 5 in the gaming board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is formed in a left gaming area 207SG002L to which a game ball can flow. 2, the right side of the image display device 5 is formed in a right game area 207SG002R in which a game ball can flow down.

  The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a game ball relatively weakly hit (left hit) by the operation of the hit ball operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 207SG002R is a left game area 207SG002L by the operation of the hit ball operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a game ball hit more strongly (right-handed) than a game ball flowing down through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5 flows down.

  In the left game area 207SG002L, the general winning opening 10 is arranged, and in the right game area 207SG002R, from the upstream to the downstream of the right game area 207SG002R, the pass gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the like. The winning opening 10 and the special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, a game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can enter the first start winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and a game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R is variable. The second starting winning opening, the general winning opening 10 and the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 formed by the winning ball device 6B can be won, and can pass through the passage gate 41.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, game balls flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot enter the second start winning opening or the special winning opening, and game balls flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot enter the first start winning opening. Has become.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-7, the main substrate 11 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is accommodated in a substrate case 207SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 207SG051 for switching to a set value change state in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value, and an opening sensor 207SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a clerk or the like of a game arcade can check the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value check state). ).

  The setting switch main body provided with a player-operable operation unit such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting switch 207SG052 is housed in the board case 207SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting switch 207SG052 are provided. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that the device can be operated without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

  Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the game machine with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 closed. The operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 207SG003 by using it. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 requires the operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like at the game arcade, so that only the store clerk having the setting key can operate the lock switch 207SG051. The lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch that can execute an ON / OFF switching operation described later by a setting key. Note that, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

  Further, a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is disposed on the board case 207SG201. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged above the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged on the front of the board case 207SG201 when the main board 11 is viewed. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened. This is the front when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the game area) of the gaming board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is A first special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of performing a variable display of one special figure, a second special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of performing a variable display of a second special figure, and a first reserved display capable of displaying a first reserved storage number. 207SG025A, a second hold display 207SG025B capable of displaying the second reserved storage number, a normal symbol display 207SG020 capable of executing a variable display of the normal symbol, a general-purpose reserve display 207SG025C capable of displaying the number of ordinary storages, A round indicator 207SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, a high base state (time saving state) and a big hit game A right-handed lamp 207SG132 that is lit in a gaming state in which a game ball such as a state is shot toward the right gaming area 207SG002R, a probable changing lamp 207SG133 that is lit when in a probable state, and a time-saving lamp 207SG134 that is lit in a high base state (time-saving state). A game information display unit 207SG200 is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4, each of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is configured by an LED of 8 segments. Further, in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, when the variation display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variation display result can be derived and displayed in a common combination. ing.

  In the case where the fluctuation display result is a big hit in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A displays the fluctuation display result in two types of big hit symbols (combinations of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derivation display is possible. In addition, in the case where the fluctuation display result is a big hit in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B displays the fluctuation display with two types of big hit symbols (lighted LED combinations) for each big hit type. Result and derived display are available.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B all have different jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed, but the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. The big hit symbol that can be derived and displayed by the above and the big hit symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may at least partially overlap.

  As shown in FIG. 9-5, each of the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B has four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In the first hold display unit 207SG025A and the second hold display unit 207SG025B, if the number of storages to be held is one, only the LED at the left end is turned on. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up sequentially. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the reserved memory decreases (consumed), and the LED on the pending display corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (a characteristic of the present embodiment). (In the section 207SG, the left direction).

  In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure hold storage is executed with priority. It is like. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 9-6, for example, when there is one first special figure reservation memory and two second special figure reservation memories (only the LED at the left end of the first reservation display 207SG025A) Is turned on and the two left LEDs of the second hold indicator 207SG25B are turned on), the execution of the variable display based on the second special figure hold storage results in zero second special figure hold storage. After that, the fluctuation display based on the first special figure reservation storage is executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-6, the round display 207SG131 includes five segments (LEDs). Note that the jackpot types in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment include a jackpot A, which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B, which is a 5-round jackpot, and a jackpot C, which is a 15-round jackpot. In addition, which of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is turned on differs depending on the type of the big hit.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And an LED control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  Note that the effect control board 12 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322 that can operate between their respective origin positions and effect positions during variable display and the like. An origin detection sensor 207SG331 that can detect that one movable body 207SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321, and a second movable body 207SG322 is located at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322. Is connected to the origin detection sensor 207SG332 which can detect that.

  FIG. 9A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the content of the effect control command used in the feature unit 207SG according to the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration. The first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 9A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9A, the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content of the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), a result of determining whether the variable display result is “losing”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result) ), And different EXT data are set according to the result of determining which of the plurality of types is the big hit type when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” (big hit type determination result).

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “losing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the stop (decision) of the decoration symbol in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is a game state (high base state) in which time reduction control is performed. , A time-saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command for specifying the occurrence of an error (abnormal) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the generated error (abnormal). In the error (abnormal) designation command, for example, the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormal) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormal) has been determined to have occurred on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by an error notification process described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fan fare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening, which notifies that the special winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type decision result by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during opening of the special winning opening or the notification command after opening of the special winning opening, different EXT data is set in accordance with the number of rounds executed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, “1” to “15”). Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. The first start symbol winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. This is a second starting port winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning port and the first starting condition has been satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning port and the second starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved storages decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of the execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for reporting the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

  The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating a newly set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (restoration of power interruption, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up by clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that a change operation of the setting value has been started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the setting value changing state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value change operation has been completed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command E105H is a setting value confirmation start notification command for notifying that a setting value confirmation operation has been started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up in the setting value confirmation state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the operation of confirming the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and updates numerical data indicating a random value independently of the CPU 103. It comprises a random number circuit 104 for performing, an input / output port (I / O) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing the program read from the ROM 101. At this time, a fixed data reading operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data in the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the data, and a Reading operation, CPU 103 receiving an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and CPU 103 outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. And a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

  FIG. 9-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIGS. 9-9, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determination, the random number value MR4 for general-purpose display result determination, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by the CPU 103 by software update using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

  In this embodiment, an example is shown in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 9-9. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 9-10 shows a fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the fluctuation display result is “losing”, the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is “big hit”. In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is “small hit”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “losing” and the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” is called a non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as a “non-reach loss fluctuation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the display result is “losing” and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in a loss variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variation display result is “loss”. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit fluctuation pattern. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit fluctuation pattern.

  The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach, normal reach α, normal reach β,. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ, in addition to super reach α and super reach β, may be provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the characteristic portion 207 SG of the present embodiment is the super reach variation pattern of super reach α and super reach β. It is set shorter than. In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is performed, The special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the super reach β, the super reach α, and the normal reach are set so that the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” so that the big hit expectation becomes higher. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of the big hit.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into the types of the fluctuation patterns, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, and the type of super reach. Rather than determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after the determination beforehand, only the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number for pattern type determination, the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type is determined. It may be determined the variation pattern to be executed from.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9 to 10, an example is shown in which the variation content (effect content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and the variation contents (effect contents) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation patterns are the same. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach loss, when the set value is 1, the variation pattern becomes the normal reach loss, and when the set value is 2, the pseudo continuous effect is performed. If the set value is 3 as the variation pattern that is executed twice and the non-reach is lost, the variation pattern may be such that the pseudo continuous production is executed three times and the super reach is lost.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to a game control program, various table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13 and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various types of determinations and decisions. In the ROM 101, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for causing the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11 and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol are displayed. And a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 9A, a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. The display result determination table shown in FIG. 9C (set value 3), the display result determination table shown in FIG. 9A (set value 4), and the display result determination table shown in FIG. Set value 5), a display result determination table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 9-12 (C), a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 9-13 (A), and FIG. B) In addition to the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. Change pattern determination Buru is included (not shown) and the like.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (payout rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in a special symbol normal process of a special symbol process process to be described later, a jackpot winning probability (a winning rate) is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to a set value. . The set value is made up of six steps from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the payout rate decreases as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. In other words, the setting value is the largest value 6 which is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the value which is more advantageous for the game arcade side as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 Become.

  FIGS. 9A to 9C and FIGS. 9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a separate display result determination table may be used for the first and second special maps.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-11 (A) to 9-11 (C) and FIGS. 9-12 (A) to 9-12 (C), in each of the display result determination tables, the game state is a probable change state ( More judgment values are assigned to the special map display result of "big hit" when in the "high accuracy state" than in the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). Thereby, in the probable change state (high-precision state) in which the probable change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time-saving state (low-probability state) is set, the special map display result is set to the "big hit" to control the big hit gaming state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1/260 when the set value is 3, (1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the setting value is 5, and 1/200 when the setting value is 6) Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the setting value is 1, 1/180 when the setting value is 2, and 1/180 when the setting value is 3). 160, 1/140 when setting value is 4, setting If it is 5 1/120, 1/100 in the case of setting value of 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probable state (high-accuracy state), the probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state so that is increased.

  In addition, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the determination values are assigned such that the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be the small hitting game state and the small hitting game state is controlled is the same. Have been. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 (A) to 9-11 (C) and FIGS. 9-12 (A) to 9-12 (C), regardless of the game state and the set value, The probability that it is determined that the special map display result is to be controlled to the small hitting game state by setting the small hit to “small hit” is set to 1/200. Note that, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be the small hitting game state and controlled to the small hitting game state regardless of the set value is the same probability. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is set to “small hit” and controlled to the small hitting game state may be made different according to the set value.

  Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that it is determined that the special map display result is set to the "big hit" and the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. The determination value is assigned so that the lower the value, the greater the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be the "big hit" and control to the big hit game state will be higher (big hit probability: set value 6> set value 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and sets the value of MR1 in FIGS. 9-11 (A) to 9-11 (C) and FIGS. 9-12. If any one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in (A) to FIG. 9-12 (C) is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Further, MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 9-11 (A) to 9-11 (C) and FIGS. 9-12 (A) to 9-12 (C). Then, it is determined that a small hit is made for the special symbol. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 9-11 (A) to 9-11 (C) and FIGS. 9-12 (A) to 9-12 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and a small hit. Indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to a big hit gaming state, and to determine whether to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol. Determining whether or not to make a small hit means to determine whether or not to control the small hitting game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a small hit symbol.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 displays the display results shown in FIGS. 9-11 (A) to 9-11 (C) and FIGS. 9-12 (A) to 9-12 (C). The judgment table is used to judge whether to make a big hit or a small hit. However, a big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are separately provided for each set value, and whether the fluctuation display result is a big hit is determined. It may be determined individually whether or not to make a small hit.

  In this embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited thereto. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

  FIGS. 9-13 (A) and 9-13 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among these, FIG. 9-13 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table in the case of doing. Further, FIG. 9-13 (B) determines the type of the big hit by using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a case table.

  The big hit type determination table indicates that the type of the big hit is one of the big hits A to C based on the hit type determining random number (MR2) when it is determined that the variation display result is a big hit symbol. Is a table referred to in order to determine

  Here, the big hit type in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as a big hit type, a big hit A (also referred to as a non-probable variable big hit) in which only the time-saving control is executed after the big hit gaming state ends and the state shifts to the low-probability high-base state, After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and a big hit B or a big hit C (also referred to as a big change big hit) which shifts to the high-accuracy high-base state is set.

  The jackpot game state by the "big hit A" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "B" is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed ten times (so-called ten rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player.

  The time-saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the “big hit A” is executed by executing the special figure game a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment), or The game ends when the big hit game state is reached before the figure game is executed.

  On the other hand, the high-precision control and the time-saving control executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the big hit game state is ended. Therefore, when the jackpot that has recurred is the jackpot B or the jackpot C, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed without going through the normal state. , A so-called extended-villa state.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, a mode in which three types of big hits A to big hit C are provided as big hit types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is two. You may provide less than the kind, or four or more kinds.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9A, in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the MR2 determination value range is 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, of the determination value range of MR2 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the big hit B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the big hit B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “4”, from 0 to 299 of the determination value range of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “5”, in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the big hit B. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “6”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 is assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 149 is assigned to the big hit B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

  As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the rate of determining the big hit A in which only the time-saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time-saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the big hits B and big hits C in which both the positive hit control and the positive change control are executed, the ratio of determining the big hit C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set value is 5, 4, 3, 2,. The smaller the order of 1, the lower the payout rate.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-13 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the determination value range of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the big hit B. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 is assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 159 is assigned to the big hit B. , 160 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “4”, in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the big hit B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “5”, in the range of the determination value of MR2 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the big hit B. , 120 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “6”, from 0 to 299 of the determination value range of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (No judgment value is assigned to the big hit B).

  As described above, when the big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the rate of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is finished is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game is finished. Of the big hits B and big hits C in which both the positive hit control and the positive change control are executed, the ratio of determining the big hit C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the fluctuation special figure is the second special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set value is 5, 4, 3, 2,. The smaller the order of 1, the lower the payout rate.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, if the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In the case where the determination rate of the jackpot type is different depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although it is included, even when the fluctuation special map is the second special map and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, a case where the big hit type is determined to be the big hit B may be provided. .

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different depending on the set value set, so that the gaming interest can be improved. It has become.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The determination may be performed using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, the more advantageous to the player (the bigger the jackpot probability is, and the bigger hit C as the big hit type is more easily determined). Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a smaller set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be more advantageous to the player.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the big hit probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the gaming property itself does not change. The present invention is not limited to this, and the game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is set to a gaming property (a so-called probability variation loop type) in which the probability variation state loops at a rate of 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable prize ball device 7 during the jackpot game. On the other hand, the game state after the end of the big hit game is controlled to the certain change state, while the ratio of the game balls passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the variation special figure (so-called V). If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during the high base (during the time reduction control). Ball is specially variable A predetermined switch provided in the sphere device 7 may be a game of (so-called one two-kind mixed type) which controls the jackpot gaming state based on passing. Furthermore, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of 1 to 3, the gaming characteristics are the same, but the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the small hit probability is high while the number of prize balls obtainable during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). .

  Furthermore, when changing the playability in accordance with the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). Used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (the game state is changed based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch, It may be used as a switch for controlling to a big hit game state.

  Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. Is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a variation pattern determination table for a big hit which is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “big hit”, and the variation display result is “small hit”. A variation pattern determination table for a big hit that is used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for a loss that is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “losed” is prepared in advance. ing.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within a range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take is assigned as a determination value.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-15 (A) and 9-15 (B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, a jackpot variation pattern determination table (the jackpot A) used when the jackpot type is the jackpot A. ) And a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is for jackpot B and jackpot C are prepared in advance. A) and the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C) include the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and the super reach β big hit For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined value within a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take A random value is assigned as a judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the set value is “1” in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), one of the MR1 determination value ranges 1 to 997 is set. To 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, 401 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the big hit. When the set value is “2”, out of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 380 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach large hit, and 381 to 835 Are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 836 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 360 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 361 to 820 Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 821 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “4”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 340 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 341 to 805 Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 806 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is “5”, out of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 320 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 321 to 790 Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 791 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. Further, when the set value is “6”, out of the determination value range of MR3 1 to 997, 1 to 300 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 301 to 775. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 776 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

  As shown in FIG. 9-15 (B), in the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits B and big hits C), when the set value is “1”, the determination value range of MR3 is 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, 201 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 551 to 997 are assigned to It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 180 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 181 to 510 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is allocated, and the fluctuation patterns 511 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 160 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 161 to 470 are determined. The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “4”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 141 to 430 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is allocated, and 431 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 120 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 121 to 390 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is allocated, and the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of 391 to 997 is allocated to the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “6”, 1 to 100 out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 101 to 350 The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit.

  As described above, when the jackpot A is won in the special map game, the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. Higher and higher in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In addition, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special map game, the ratio of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the superreach α jackpot. The ratio is higher than the ratio and decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when the type of the big hit is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In this case, since the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may determine that “big hit B” or “big hit C” may be obtained. Expectations can be increased.

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random number value within a range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take with respect to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) is determined. Assigned as. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is any of 1 to 6, the determination value range of MR3 is 0 to 997. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as small hit variation patterns. The variation pattern of the small hit may be determined at a different ratio from the plurality of variation patterns with the set values 1 to 6.

  Further, the loss variation pattern determination table includes a loss variation pattern determination table A that is used when the number of stored games is one or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time saving control, and a low base. Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and variation for loss used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is the high base state in which the time saving control is performed are prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned to the variation pattern of β loss (PA2-3) as the determination value.

  As shown in FIG. 9-16 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for one or less low base medium total pending storage number), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach loss (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and up to 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “4”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 391 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach, which correspond to the total number of stored storages of 2 to 4, respectively. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range in which a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 9-16 (B), in the losing variation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storages), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 481 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range of MR3 0 to 997, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 461 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “4”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 441 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 421 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 401 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach that correspond to the total number of stored memories of 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range in which a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 9-16 (C), in the loss variation pattern determination table C (for five or more low base medium total pending storages), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and up to 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 531 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 511 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “4”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 491 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 471 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss corresponding to the time reduction control are shown. PA2-2) and a variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

  As shown in FIG. 9D, in the loss variation pattern determination table D (for high-base medium use), when the set value is “1”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach loss (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to super reach α. Loss variation patterns (PA2-2) are assigned, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 531 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  Further, when the set value is “4”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  As described above, when the loss variation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the rate at which the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is determined is higher than the rate at which the super reach variation pattern is determined, and the rate at which the normal reach variation pattern is determined. Are set to be lower in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Further, when using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the variation values of 701 to 900 among the determination values are the variation patterns of the super reach α loss, and the variation values of 901 to 997 are the variation of the super reach β loss regardless of the variation pattern determination table. If the fluctuation display result is lost, that is, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by the common determination ratio regardless of the set value, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined. It is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss as the variation pattern for the loss are completely the same between each set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are different between each set value. May differ by a small difference (for example, about 1%).

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the form in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the fluctuation display result is a loss, regardless of the set value, the non-reach, the normal reach, and the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of the super reach are the same. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the variation pattern of either the non-reach or the normal reach may be the same.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss Although an example in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. If the variable display result is lost, the super reach α The determination ratio of only one of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Although an example is shown in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value, the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, an example in which the determination ratio of the non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern is different depending on the set value is illustrated. Depending on the set value that is set, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation patterns and the normal reach fluctuation patterns. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value that has been set means that one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or that the specific variation pattern is 100%. It also includes the determination of the percentage.

  The variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the variation of the non-reach loss is smaller than the variation pattern (PA1-2). The variation time of the pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see FIGS. 9-10). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, and the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit number of four. Sometimes, when the start winning is made, it becomes difficult to cause useless starting winning in which the holding memory is not made, and when the number of the holding memories is reduced, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss without shortening the fluctuation time is long. By determining PA1-1), it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed because the variable display time is lengthened.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-16 (A) to 9-16 (C), the variation is determined by using a loss Although the mode for determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of reserved storages in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, The variation pattern may be determined using a different loss pattern determination table depending on the number of stored special symbols and the variation display of the second special symbol (in the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 6, the variation pattern of the super reach loss The ranges of random numbers assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the losing probability are different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the super-reach losing variation pattern (the super-reach losing variation pattern) (Appearance rate) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the rate at which the fluctuation display is performed in the super reach loss fluctuation pattern differs according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, The present invention is not limited to this. Considering the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the fluctuation display shows the fluctuation of the super reach loss at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed in a pattern.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 102 is retained for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply becomes incapable of discharging the backup power supply). You. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating a progress state of the game.

  The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure reservation storage unit, a second special figure reservation storage unit, a general figure reservation storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, a game control counter, and the like. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

  The first special map holding storage unit stores the special map which has not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and the starting winning (first starting winning) has been generated. The hold data of the game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the hold number in the first start winning opening and establishes the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 or the like based on the random number value MR1 for fluctuation display result determination, the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. The storage is performed until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure game is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display result) in this special figure game ) Is the hold information that enables determination of whether or not a big hit will be made.

  The second special map holding storage unit stores a special winning start (second starting winning) when a game ball passes (enters) a second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, but the starting has not yet started. It stores the hold data of the figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B). As an example, the second special map holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the hold number in the second starting winning opening and establishes the second starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 or the like based on the random number value MR1 for fluctuation display result determination, the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. It is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display result) in this special figure game ) Is the hold information that enables determination of whether or not a big hit will be made.

  It should be noted that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, the opening information indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening is included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

  The general figure holding storage unit stores the general figure holding information that has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 yet, even though the game ball passing through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure holding storage unit associates the game balls with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls passed through the pass gate, and based on the passing of the game balls, the CPU 103 extracts the general figure display result determination from the random number circuit 104 and the like. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 and the like are stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state.

  The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting a part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random number value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or an arithmetic process on all or a part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, the display of the display monitor 207SG029 on the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the display monitor 207SG029 includes a first display unit 207SG029A, a second display unit 207SG029B, a third display unit 207SG029C, and a fourth display unit 207SG029D. Each of the first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E is made up of seven segments composed of seven segments that draw the character “8” and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

  Note that the display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the non-test target area in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is tested. .

  As shown in FIGS. 9-17 (B) and 9-17 (C), the display monitor 207SG029 displays the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability low-base state) for every 6000 balls out of all game states. Base L which is a (real-time value during measurement), Base 1 which is a base value calculated in a normal state (low-probability low base state) for each first out 6000 balls in all game states, and Base 1 in all game states Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability low-base state) for every second 6000 balls, and normal state (low-probability low-base state) for every third 6000 balls in all game states And the base value 3, which is the base value calculated in step (1), can be displayed. The base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 in percentage.

  When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “L.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B to display “bL.” Which is an abbreviation of the base L. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b." Is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display "b1." Which is an abbreviation of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b.” Is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “2.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B to display “b2.” Which is an abbreviation of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b.” Is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “3.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B to display “b3.” Which is an abbreviation of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D.

  In the display monitor 207SG029 of the present embodiment, control for sequentially displaying these base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 is executed by control of the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-19, the main board 11 executes a control of switching the display on the display monitor 207SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. Note that the display of each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 has a different display color according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-18, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1”, each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine is displayed. When the set value set to 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “4”, each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is set to "5", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in red, and the base value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. If the set value is "6" displays the base value in the display monitor 207SG029 at purple. For this reason, the clerk at the amusement arcade can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 207SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the set value changing process described later. ing.

  Next, a game control main process in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-20 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (207SGSa002). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is one of 1 to 6, that is, whether a normal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa005).

  If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value changing process described later was being executed before the power interruption (that the power interruption occurred during the execution of the set value changing process) is set. Is determined (207SGSa006). When the set value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and when the set value changing flag is not set, a RAM clear flag indicating that a RAM clear process described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

  If the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), RAM clear processing for clearing the RAM 102 is executed (207SGSa009), the RAM clear flag is set again, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa008; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 without executing 207SGSa009 and 207SGSa010.

  In 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). If the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started while the lock switch 207SG051 is ON and the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (207SGSa013a).

  If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), the CPU executes a set value change process (207SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, proceeds to 207SGSa014, and proceeds to 207SGSa014. Is not set (207SGSa013a; N), a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014.

  If the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011; N) or if the release sensor is OFF (207SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa014 without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

  In 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag has been set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 has been cleared at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 this time (ie, whether or not the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) has been executed) ( 207 SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is set to stop power supply (power interruption). A recovery process is performed to return to the state (207SGSa015).

  In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the game state is restored, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored (started by hot start) in a state before the power interruption, transmits a command for restoration including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

  Further, in 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started while the clear switch is being operated (207SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) and whether or not the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal set value is not set. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in accordance with a formal procedure by an operation of an amusement arcade employee or the like (the pachinko gaming machine 207SG003 is opened, and the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on and the clear switch is operated while operating the pachinko gaming machine). When the device 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (207SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the processing of 207SGSa009 to 207SGSa016 described above is executed.

  If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and if the open sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

  Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by a cold start and transmits a restoration command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to a period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set (207SGSa023), and as shown in FIG. 9-26 (A), all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are set. The notification of the cold start is started by starting the blinking (207SGSa024).

  After the execution of 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (207SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has expired (207SGSa026). If the cold start notification timer has not expired (207SGSa026; N), the processing of 207SGSa025 and 207SGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and if the cold start notification timer has expired (207SGSa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 207SG029 Is stopped (207SGSa027), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa028.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which all segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are blinked during the cold start notification timer period (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, only some of the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may blink. Alternatively, at least some of the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be turned on.

  Then, in 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and instructs the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms). The register of the built-in CTC is set (207SGSa029), and the interruption is permitted (207SGSa030). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  In addition, in 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 sends an instruction to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), the fact that the CPU 103 has returned from a power cut during the setting change described later, and the like. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (207SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution wait timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by one (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has expired (207SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer has not expired (207SGSa034; N), the processing of 207SGSa033 and 207SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer has expired (207SGSa034; Y), FIG. As shown in (B), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit 207SG029B constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are used to notify the occurrence of a setting value abnormality error or to recover from a power interruption during setting change (error notification). , "E." is displayed on each of the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (207SGSa035).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game arcade via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the game console, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa032 to 207SGSa037 until the power interruption of the pachinko gaming machine 1 occurs (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by an operation of a clerk of the game arcade), thereby displaying the display monitor 207SG029. Then, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B perform error notification.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment displays the display monitor 207SG029 and the first monitor 207SG029 when the abnormal set value is set or the power returns from the power cut during the change of the set value. The error notification is performed by the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, so that the clerk of the game arcade can generate an error and set values from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that it has recovered from the power interruption during the change. In addition, since the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the return from the power interruption during the change of the set value can be recognized by the management device of the gaming arcade, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. Has become.

  In the game control main process of the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the setting value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the form in which the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Is not the case where the clear switch is determined to be ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the case where it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014, not after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021 (20). SGSa014; Y) to be executed.

  FIG. 9-21 (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clear process (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface process. In the RAM clear processing, the CPU 103 first specifies the second address from the top in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, “00H” is set (stored) at the designated address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address (FXXX described later) of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043). If the specified address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is specified (207SGSa044), and the specified address is the address (F002) storing the RAM clear flag. It is determined whether or not it is (207SGSa45).

  If the specified address is not the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa042, and if the specified address is the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the next Then, the process proceeds to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). If the specified address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clear processing ends.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to the RAM 102 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment for each storage area. Of these storage areas, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the top of the RAM 102 is described later. The temporary setting value is stored. Further, a RAM clear flag is stored at the third address (F002). At other addresses (after F003), game information including special figure hold storage, general figure hold storage, values of various counters, various timers, various flags, and error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored. . The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among other areas in which other information is stored. In addition, a value (for example, a set value “0”) indicating a factory shipping state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started while the value indicating the factory shipping state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, The pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process may be prompted to be restarted by a display on the display device 5 or the like.

  In other words, the RAM clear processing in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is processing for clearing data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing “00H” in an address excluding the set value.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment, an example in which data other than the set value is cleared in the RAM clear processing is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the game is started at the start, only the game information stored at a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (after the address F003 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment) may be cleared.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102 as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag may be stored in the game control microcomputer. By storing them in 100 registers (for example, any of an accumulator that is the center of operation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, and a general-purpose register), the process of storing and reading the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102 is omitted, The processing load on the CPU 103 may be reduced. When the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. Can be prevented from being overwritten by the information (data).

  FIG. 9-22 is a flowchart showing a setting value change process (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the setting value changing process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the first hold display. The blinking of the second hold indicator 207SG025A and 207SG025B is started (207SGSa052, see FIG. 9-27 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 sets only one of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 as a mode according to the setting value change process (a mode other than the big hit A, big hit B, or big hit C shown in FIG. 9-6). Is started (207SGSa052a).

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether any of the values 1 to 6 is stored as the setting value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored as a set value in the RAM 102, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in 207SGSa020), the set value is stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. Is set (the set value is reset to “1”), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any value of 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

  In 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a power-off detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power-off detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power-off detection process execution start waiting timer is decremented by one (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether the power-off detection process execution start wait timer has expired (207SGSa056). When the power-off detection processing execution start waiting timer has not expired (207SGSa056; N), the processing of 207SGSa055 and 207SGSa056 is repeatedly executed, and when the power-off detection processing execution wait timer has timed out (207SGSa056; Y). Executes a power-off detection process (207SGSa057).

  After the execution of the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game arcade (207SGSa059).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (207SGSa061), and determines whether or not the setting change switch 207SG052 has been operated (207SGSa062). If the setting switch 207SG052 has not been operated (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065. If the setting switch 207SG052 has been operated (207SGSa062; Y), the address F001 in the RAM 102 is determined based on the operation of the setting switch 207SG052. The content is updated (207SGSa063).

  Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is “1”, “2”, which is a setting value that is one step more advantageous for the player than “1”, is set as the temporary setting value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is “2”, “3” which is one step more advantageous for the player than “2” is temporarily set. For example, a value larger than the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 by 1 is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a borrowed setting, such as storing the set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored as a temporary set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new temporary set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or stores it in the address F001. A process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is executed.

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the set value (or the temporary set value) on the display monitor 207SG029. Is completed (207SGSa067), and all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned off (207SGSa067a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a temporary setting value is stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). If the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072. If the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; Y), It is determined whether or not the value of the set value stored at the address F000 is different from the value of the temporary set value stored at the address F001 (207SGSa070).

  If the value of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is the same as the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, where it is stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. If the set value stored in the address F001 is different from the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070; Y), the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 is stored in the address F000. It stores (207SGSa071) and proceeds to 207SGSa072. That is, in the process of 207SGSa071, the temporary setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual setting value.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the setting value change processing.

  FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing a setting value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value confirmation processing, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the first hold display. The blinking of the second hold indicator 207SG025B and 207SG025A is started (207SGSa102, see FIG. 9-27 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 sets only one of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 as a mode according to the set value confirmation process (a mode other than the big hit A, big hit B, or big hit C shown in FIG. 9-6). Is started (207SGSa103).

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power-off detection processing execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power-off detection processing is executed (207SGSa105). ). Then, the value of the power-off detection process execution start waiting timer is decremented by one (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the power-off detection process execution start wait timer has expired (207SGSa107). If the power-off detection process execution start waiting timer has not expired (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGSa106 and 207SGSa107 are repeatedly executed, and if the power-off detection process execution wait timer has expired (207SGSa107; Y). Executes a power-off detection process (207SGSa108). The power-off detection processing (207SGSa108) is the same processing as the power-off detection processing (207SGSa057) of the above-described setting value change processing.

  After executing the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game arcade (207SGSa110).

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the processing of 207SGSa111. When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in the 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the set values on the display monitor 207SG029 is terminated (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. Are turned off (207SGSa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa 115), and ends the setting value confirmation processing.

  As described above, the lighting of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B, and the round display device 207SG131 from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, and the first hold display device 207SG025A, By starting blinking of the hold display 207Sg025B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232, the player or the clerk of the game hall can change the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or change the set value. It is possible to recognize that it is under confirmation.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, at the start of the set value change processing or the set value confirmation processing, as a mode corresponding to the set value change processing or the set value confirmation processing, one of the segments constituting the round display 207SG 131 Although only one LED is illuminated, the present invention is not limited to this. The lighting patterns of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 are the big hit A, the big hit shown in FIG. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as the mode does not correspond to any of B and big hit C.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (A), at the start of the set value change process or the set value check process, a mode corresponding to the set value change process or the set value check process As an example, a case is described in which the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 are lit in the same manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 may have a set value change. Lighting may be performed in different modes at the start of the process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut off) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is opened with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 opened. The setting value change process is executed by turning on the clear switch and the clear switch.

  At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit are turned off by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as shown in FIGS. Display using the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value illustrated in FIGS. 9 to 17) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 in the present embodiment uses a different number of display units when executing the set value changing process at the time of startup and when displaying the base value after the startup is completed.

  Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value changing process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the setting change switch 207SG052 is operated in a state where the set value is displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG029D, the display on the fourth display unit 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off once (power cut off) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 opened. By setting the (clear switch OFF), the set value confirmation processing is executed.

  At this time, as shown in FIGS. 9-25 (A), 9-25 (B) and 9-25 (E), the display monitor 207SG029 turns off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to thereby perform the first operation. The display using the display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value illustrated in FIGS. 9 to 17) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 according to the present embodiment uses a different number of display units when executing the set value confirmation process at the time of startup and when displaying the base value after the startup is completed.

  Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. Note that the display of the set value on the fourth display unit 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a playable state.

  FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing the power interruption detection process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. In the setting value confirmation processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value from a power supply board (not shown) (207SGS081). If there is no power-off signal input (207SGS081; N), the process is terminated. If there is a power-off signal input (207SGS081; Y), backup data including setting value information stored in RAM 122 is specified. Then, the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS083). Then, after creating check data to be used for restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

  In the game control timer interrupt process in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-28, the CPU 103 executes the same power-off detection process (207SGS200) as the above-described 207SGSa057 and 207SGSa108. Thereafter, S21 to S27 (see FIG. 4) are executed.

  Next, the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

  FIG. 9-29 is a flowchart showing the production control main processing executed by the production control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Circuit) register setting.

  Further, effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from main board 11 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by one (207SGS404), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has expired (207SGS405). If the command reception waiting timer has expired (207SGS405; N), the processes of 207SGS404 and 207SGS405 are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the command reception waiting timer expires.

  When the command reception waiting timer has expired (207SGS405; Y), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hot start notification command has been received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player information is input in a player information input process described later). After receiving the input of the information, the information (information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc.) stored in the RAM 122 is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

  If no hot start notification command has been received (207SGS406; N), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a cold notification command has been received (207SGS408). If the cold notification command is received (207SGS408; Y), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 122 since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, (Information including the number of times of super reach, etc.) is cleared (207SGS409), and it is notified that the information stored in the RAM 102 has been cleared and that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. A RAM clear notification process for executing (RAM clear notification) is executed (207SGS410). In the RAM clear notification process, the image on the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-236 (A), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 on the image display device 5 are cleared). The display of the notification image 207SG005M1), the emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like are performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the clerk at the game hall that has started the pachinko gaming machine 1 For example, it is only necessary to be able to notify that the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After the execution of the RAM clear notification process, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

  If no cold start notification command has been received (207SGS408; N), effect control CPU 120 determines whether a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command has been received (207SGS411). When the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the change of the set value is performed. A setting value related notification process for executing notification that the operation is being performed (setting value changing notification) and notification of the setting value being confirmed (setting value checking notification) is executed (207SGS412).

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as the notification during the change of the set value or the notification during the confirmation of the set value, as shown in FIGS. 9-36 (B) and 9-36 (C), , A notification image 207SG005M2 indicating that the set value is being changed or a notification image 207SG005M3 indicating that the set value is being checked, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the set value changed state or the set value confirmed state. In general, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open, and a clerk of a game arcade or the like who changes or checks a set value visually recognizes the display monitor 207SG029 mounted on the main board 11. It is in the state of doing. In other words, the set value change state or the set value confirmation state is a state in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a store clerk or the like at the game hall where the set value is changed or confirmed. It is considered that the clerk of the game hall cannot judge from the display of the image display device 5 whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state. Therefore, as the notification during the change of the set value or the notification during the check of the set value, the pachinko game machine is used by a clerk of a game hall to change or check the set value by outputting sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R and emitting light of the game effect lamp 9. It may be notified that 1 is operating in a set value change state or a set value confirmation state.

  Further, effect control CPU 120 performs first movable body initialization processing (207SGS413) for checking the operation of first movable body 207SG321, and second movable body initialization for performing the operation check of second movable body 207SG322. The processing (207SGS414) is executed. In the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is performed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. (See FIGS. 9-35).

  Here, the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-33 and 9-34. FIG. 9-33 is a schematic explanatory view showing an operation mode of the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. 9A-34 are explanatory diagrams showing the control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, and FIG. 9B is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the non-detection operation control.

  The first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are provided so as to be able to reciprocate between respective origin positions (first positions) and rendering positions (second positions). The forward operation to the second position) and the return operation from the rendering position to the origin position are actual operation modes of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 during the variable display.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines whether the detected portions of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 when the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are performed, If the bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 move for some reason (for example, if they have moved from the home position during transportation or installation on a gaming island, or if they have not been able to return to the home position during the previous operation, for example, The movable body 207 SG 321, 207 SG 322 has a movable body error (operation abnormality) such as a failure to confirm or return to the origin due to a key failure, a failure, or the like, and the movable body 207 SG 321 or 207 SG 322 has moved from the home position due to the vibration of the gaming machine. Depending on the position other than the origin position. (For example, a predetermined position between the origin position and the united position, such as a position indicated by a black circle corresponding to the non-detection operation control in FIG. 9-22), the non-detection operation control for returning to the origin is executed. I do. When performing the non-detection operation control, since the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located at positions away from the origin position, the only operation is to move the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 toward the origin position.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs the non-detection operation control in the first movable body initialization processing or the second movable body initialization processing, or detects the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332. If so, the actual operation check operation control is executed. The actual operation check operation control is the same operation as the actual operation actually performed in the effect using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 (for example, the movable body effect executed during the variable display).

  Next, the control speed set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. The speed shown in FIGS. 9-34 (A) and 9-34 (B) is a control speed set by the effect control CPU 120 to operate each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322. , 207SG322 differs from the actual operation speed. That is, for example, when operating the predetermined movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, even if the same control speed is set in one moving section and another moving section between the origin position and the rendering position, one moving section When the mode is different between and the other moving sections (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or when rising and falling in the same moving section, the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are used. May actually be different from the control speed. Even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, if there is a difference in the size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc. of each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, , 207SG322 are not necessarily the same. When the plurality of movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated by the same performance stepping motor, even if the same control speed is set for each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, the size, weight, When there is a difference in the operation mode, the operation distance, the drive mechanism, and the like, the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not necessarily the same.

  As shown in FIG. 9-34 (A), when effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation check operation control, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer in the set actual operation check process data. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the set control speed. Specifically, control is performed such that after accelerating from the origin position, decelerate and stop at the rendering position, and accelerate after decelerating from the rendering position and stop at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 can normally operate, the control speed of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is reduced between the origin position and the production position. Change from high speed to low speed. That is, when performing the effect using each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, the effect control CPU 120 performs the lowest speed (low speed) as the first speed and the highest speed (high speed) as the second speed higher than the lowest speed. In order to control each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 to operate at a speed within the range described above, even when executing the actual operation check operation control, the minimum speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the minimum speed Is controlled so that each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 operates at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the fast second speed.

  That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the control speeds are set so as to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operation speeds. Is set. In the following, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the minimum control speed, they operate at the lowest speed, and when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the maximum control speed, they operate at the maximum speed. It will be described that it operates.

  Here, the control speed is set such that the operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 during acceleration and deceleration are the minimum speeds in the actual operation confirmation operation control. In addition, when returning to the origin position after moving to the production position, the movable body 207SG321, After the 207 SG 322 is surely decelerated, the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensors 207 SG 331 and 207 SG 332.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-34 (B), when performing the non-detection operation control, the effect control CPU 120 performs a period of moving from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. , So as to always operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the actual operation check operation control. That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control is lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this embodiment). In the characteristic part 207SG of the embodiment, the control speed is always based on the lowest control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation check operation control so as to be the same as the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control). Control for operating the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is performed.

  In this case, since it is unknown how far the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located from the origin position, if the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located near the origin position, the actual operation confirmation operation control When the movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 is returned to the origin position when the movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 returns to the origin position, the detected part cannot be reliably detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG321, 207SG332, or the movable body can be moved from a short distance. The movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 and the like may be damaged by an impact when the bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 return to the origin positions and are restricted, so that the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 operate at the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Control.

  Returning to FIG. 9-29, after performing the first movable body initialization processing (207SGS413) and the second movable body initialization processing (207SGS413), the effect control CPU 120 sets the set value during the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321. It is determined whether or not a set value early change end flag indicating that the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value has been completed is set (207SGS415). If the set value early change end flag is not set (207SGS415; N), it is further determined whether or not a set value change end notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). When the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and when the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are not received (207SGS416; Y). Goes to 207SGS417. If the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS415; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS417 without executing the process of 207SGS416.

  In 207SGS417, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization (operation check) of first movable body 207SG321 has been completed (207SGS417). If the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 has not been completed (207SGS417; N), the set value early change end flag is set, the process proceeds to 207SG412 (207SGS418), and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. If there is (207SGS417; Y), it is determined whether the initialization (operation check) of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419). If the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 has not been completed (207SGS419; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412. If the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419; Y), the setting value early change end. It is determined whether the flag is set (207SGS420).

  In 207SGS420, when the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS420; Y), the set value early change end flag is cleared (207SGS421), and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422) which is the same process as 207SGS413. And the second movable body initialization process (207SGS423), which is the same process as the 207SGS414, is executed, and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422), the 207SGS414, and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS423) are performed. It is determined whether the initialization (operation check) of the body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS424). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is not completed (207SGS424; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS422, and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed. (207SGS424; Y) proceeds to 207SGS427.

  As described above, with respect to the processing of these 207 SG 412 to 207 SG 424, as shown in FIG. At the time when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the set value change state or the set value confirmation state), the set value change notification and the set value confirmation notification are started, and the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are performed. Execute Note that, as described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the second movable body initialization processing is executed after the first movable body initialization processing ends, that is, the first movable body 207SG321 After the operation check, an operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is executed.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (A), the effect control CPU 120 sends a set value change end notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command to the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing. When receiving, that is, when the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is finished, the first movable body initialization processing and the second A movable body initialization process is performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (B), the effect control is performed at a timing when only the first movable body initialization processing of the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing is completed. When the use CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, that is, the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 has been completed, but the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed. If the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed in a state where there is no setting, the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are executed again after the second movable body initialization processing is completed. It has become.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (C), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command at a timing when the first movable body initialization processing has not been completed yet. In other words, when the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed in a state where the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 has not been completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body Only the initialization processing is executed, and the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not executed again.

  When the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command are not received in 207SGS411 (207SGS411; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether an error designation command is received (207SGS425). . If an error designation command has been received (207SGS425; Y), an error notification process (207SGS426) for performing the error notification indicated by the error designation command is executed. If no error designation command has been received (207SGS425; N), , 207SGS403.

  In addition, as the error notification in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (D), the image display device 5 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified from the error designation command. Good.

  As described above, in the effect control main processing in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-30, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the hot start, the player information (the player information While the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc., after receiving the input from the RAM 122 are cleared, while the production information (the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reachs, etc. since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1). ) And set value information (any numerical value of “1” to “6” corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting value change state or the setting confirmation state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is already stored in the RAM 122. Overwrites (updates) the existing setting value information.

  That is, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a set value confirmation state, or a set value change state. I have.

  Then, in 207 SGS 427, effect control CPU 120 specifies which of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, and a setting value confirmation end notification command has been received, and in image display device 5, The display of the initial symbol corresponding to the command that has been started is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-31, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. If not set, the display of the decorative design is started on the image display device 5 as a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as an initial design. When the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "from the left as an initial symbol is displayed on the image display device 5. The display of the decorative symbol is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

  In the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "4", "5" from the left as initial symbols are displayed on the image display device 5. "," 6 ", the display of decorative symbols is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example," 6 ") that is advantageous to the player is When set, a decorative pattern is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as an initial symbol at a higher ratio than when a setting value (for example, "1") disadvantageous to the player is set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that a setting value that is advantageous for the player is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "4", "5" from the left as initial symbols are displayed on the image display device 5. "," 6 ", the display of decorative symbols is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example," 6 ") that is advantageous to the player is The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different between the case where the setting is set and the case where the setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, “1”) is set. Further, when the setting value that is advantageous to the player (for example, “6”) is set and when the setting value that is disadvantageous for the player (for example, “1”) is set, the speakers 8L and 8R The volume of the output sound, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be varied.

  Returning to FIG. 9-29, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” to the look-ahead restriction counter in order to restrict the execution of the prefetch notice effect in the first four fluctuations (207SGS428). Then, effect control CPU 120 shifts to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When a timer interrupt occurs, effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in a timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following processing.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes a startup notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (207SGS431). In the start notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interrupt is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If this is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined which of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value confirmation end notification command has been received. A start notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and a start notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. After the start-up notification process timer is started, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started based on the value of the start-up notification process timer and the start-up notification process table by executing the start-up notification process in the next and subsequent interrupts. The notification may be executed.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated is a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, or a setting value confirmation end notification command. The state of the start notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different depending on whether there is any.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-32, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, a hot start notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command is received, that is, a new pachinko gaming machine 1 When the set value is not set, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed. The timing at which the game effect lamp 9 starts emitting light for 60 seconds and the timing at which the output sound A starts for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the timing at which the game effect lamp 9 starts emitting light for 60 seconds. The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  Further, when the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when a new set value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. , The light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  In other words, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or a setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 causes the gaming effect lamp 9 to emit light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R to emit light for 30 seconds. Output of the output sound A, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputs the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Performing the output of B includes both.

  In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated and receives the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command, the gaming effect lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R emit light for 20 seconds. Of the output sound C, and display of a message image (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed) for 40 seconds on the image display device 5. It should be noted that the emission start timing of the gaming effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The emission start timing of the gaming effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

  In particular, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the setting value change end notification command is received. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received. Differently, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is described in which the start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is executed using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management computer such as a management computer of a game arcade or a counter of each unit, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. As a start-up notification at this time, a signal that can specify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, a device that executes the start notification even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts in any of the hot start, the cold start, the setting change state, and the setting confirmation state is partially common. Although a certain form (in which light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether the device is started in a start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. (For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the image display device 5 When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the setting changed, a signal is output from the above-mentioned external output terminal to the management device. It may be, or the like) that.

  In addition, the notification mode of each device that executes the start notification may be made different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are turned on, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state. In this case, only some of the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may emit light.

  Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko gaming machine 1). When three or more speakers are provided, sound is output from only some of the speakers), and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, sound output from all speakers 8L and 8R may be performed. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as “setting is being changed”, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, a message image indicating that the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 have been cleared, such as “RAM cleared”, may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  Further, when a plurality of the above-mentioned external output terminals are provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the terminals for outputting signals to the management device may be made different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the change of the setting value is completed (the time until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value designation command is received) is used as the setting value change notification. During the period, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the setting change to the management device, and after the change of the set value is completed, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear to the management device as RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear to the management device as the RAM clear notification.

  When the external output terminal is used commonly for each notification, the timing of outputting a signal to the management device may be made different according to each notification.

  As described above, in the start-up notification process, a form in which the start-up notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different according to the received command is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 May be executed in one notification mode regardless of the received command. In addition, the start notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 exemplifies a mode in which the start notification is performed even when any of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, and a set value change end notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this. Among the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command, the pachinko gaming machine 1 A command that does not execute the start notification may be provided.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment, as an initialization effect in the present invention, a start notification in a different mode is executed according to a command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the command received when the is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The mode of the start notification and the combination of the decorative symbols may be all different according to the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, or only a part of them may be the same.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a hot start, activated by a cold start, activated by a setting change state, or activated by a setting confirmation state. Also, the present invention is not limited to this, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or started in a setting confirmation state, the start notification is performed. May not be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 9-29, the effect control CPU 120 next executes power-off detection processing (207 SGS 432). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIGS. 9-37, first, effect control CPU 120 receives an input of a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value from a power supply board (not shown). It is determined whether or not (207SGS441). If there is no power-off signal input (207SGS441; N), the process is terminated. If there is a power-off signal input (207SGS441; Y), the set value information and player information stored in the RAM 122 are deleted. The backup data included is specified (207SGS442), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS443). Then, after creating check data to be used for restoring the backup data and storing the check data in the backup data storage area (207SGS444), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

  Returning to FIG. 9-29, next, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 207SGS433). In this command analysis processing, effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis processing, the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed as to which command (see FIG. 9-8).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 performs an effect control process (207SGS434). In the effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

  Next, an effect random number update process (207SGS435) for updating the count value of a counter for generating an effect random number such as a big hit symbol determination random number, a player information input process for accepting input of player information (207SGS436), A player information output process for outputting player information (207SGS437) and a performance information totaling process (207SGS438) for totaling performance information are executed. After that, the processing shifts to S52.

  In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player to change the password (the password generated by an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance). The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and can receive the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of times of change, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, and the like as player information stored each time a variable display, a big hit game, or a super reach is executed.

  In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player, and generates the two-dimensional code. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player can read the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a portable terminal such as a smartphone and transmit the player information totalized in the current game to an external server, thereby obtaining a pachinko gaming machine. 1 can be stored in the server.

  In the effect information totaling process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of large hits, the number of super reach, and the like stored in the RAM 122 as effect information each time a variable display, a big hit game, or a super reach is executed. I do.

  Next, a description will be given of the effect control process processing in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 9-38, in the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is “0” (207SGS451). If the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is “0” (207SGS451; Y), after executing the look-ahead notice setting process (S161), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is performed according to the effect control process flag. Perform the above processing.

  If the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is any one of "1" to "4" (207SGS451; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452). ). If the value of the effect control process flag is “0” or any of “2” to “7” (207SGS452; N), any one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is performed according to the effect control process flag. When the processing is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (207SGS452; Y), the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is decremented by 1 (207SGS453), and S170 to S177 (S170 to S177) are performed according to the effect control process flag. (See FIG. 7). As described above, by executing the processing of 207SGS451 to 207SGS453, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after the start, the execution of the prefetch notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby displaying the variable display four times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 determines whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated, based on the start-up prize determination process (see FIG. 5), the execution of the prefetch notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays.

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect over four variable displays is restricted based on the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 can play a game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Based on the fact that the game has become possible, the settings relating to the progress of the game include the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game The light amount of the effect lamp 9, the setting of the effect according to the RTC, and the like may be set to the state at the time of factory shipment.

  As described above, in pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), effect control CPU 120 performs super reach A or super reach B as the first suggestion effect, The super-reach C or super-reach D can be executed as the second suggestion effect, and the super-reach C or super-reach D can be executed when the super-reach C or super-reach D reach operation is executed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach C or the super reach D is notified from the start of the reach effect, the notification of the title 31AK007 according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect can be improved.

This embodiment also includes the following invention 207SG. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the setting state is notified only on the liquid crystal screen, so that the setting state cannot be appropriately notified. There was a problem. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine according to Means 1 of Invention 207SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting value changing process shown in FIG. 9-22) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
An information display unit (for example, game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Section 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the setting value by the setting unit is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which setting can be performed (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is performing the setting value changing process illustrated in FIG. 9-22).
When in the setting state, the information display unit performs a display for recognizing the setting state (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 9-27 (A), the CPU 103 is performing the setting value changing process). In the case of, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on.
According to this feature, it is notified that the information display unit is in the setting state in the information display unit in which the variable display that is an important display is executed in the gaming machine. Information can be given.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 2 of Invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting value changing process shown in FIG. 9-22) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
An information display unit (for example, game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Section 207SG200),
Set by the setting means when the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when the clear switch is OFF when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON). Into a confirmation state (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 9-23),
When in the confirmation state, the information display unit performs a display for recognizing the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (A), the CPU 103 is performing the setting value confirmation processing. In the case of, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on.
According to this feature, the gaming machine is notified that the confirmation state is being displayed on the information display unit on which the variable display that is an important display is executed in the gaming machine. Information can be given.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 3 of Invention 207SG,
The display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is different from the display displayed on the information display unit during the game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-27). In addition, the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result, and the display mode when the set value is changed or the set value is confirmed are: Different parts)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to accurately recognize that the game machine is in the setting state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 4 of Invention 207SG,
In the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is performed on the variable display unit (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display). A part for lighting all the segments constituting the device 207SG004B)
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, a suitable notification can be made on the variable display section.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in Means 5 of Invention 207SG,
The variable display unit is configured by a plurality of small display units that can be turned on independently (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each configured by eight segments. Part),
As a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state, a display in which all the small display portions are turned on is performed (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is used). The part that lights up all the constituent segments)
According to this feature, the gaming machine can be easily recognized as being in the setting state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 6 of Invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that launches a game by emitting game media to a gaming area (for example, the left gaming area 207SG002L and the right gaming area 207SG002R),
The information display unit includes a launch direction notifying unit (for example, a right-handed ramp 207SG132) that notifies a launch direction of a game medium in the gaming area,
In the setting state or the confirmation state, the launch direction notifying unit performs a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 9-27 (A), Right blinking lamp 207SG132 in setting value change state or setting value confirmation state.
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform a suitable notification in the launch direction notifying unit.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in Means 7 of Invention 207SG,
A suspension storage unit (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a start winning determination process shown in FIG. 5) capable of storing information relating to the variable display as suspension information;
The information display unit includes a suspension display unit (for example, a first suspension display 207SG025A and a second suspension display 207SG025B) capable of displaying a suspension display corresponding to the suspension storage stored in the suspension storage unit,
When in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display that allows the user to recognize the setting state or the confirmation state is performed on the hold display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (A), A gaming machine characterized by blinking all segments constituting the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B in the value change state or the set value confirmation state). If this is the case, a suitable notification can be made on the hold display section.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 8 of Invention 207SG,
In the advantageous state, there is provided a special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium is less likely to enter than the first state,
The information display unit includes a number notification unit (for example, a round display unit 207SG131) that notifies the number of times the special variable device enters the first state in the advantageous state.
In the setting state or the confirmation state, a display that can recognize the setting state or the confirmation state is performed in the number-of-times notification unit (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 9-27 (A), In the value change state or the set value confirmation state, a portion in which only one segment is turned on among the segments configuring the round display 207SG131)
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, a suitable notification can be performed in the number notification unit.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 8 of Invention 207SG,
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing at least game information for the game control means to control the progress of the game,
Detecting means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting a state of the gaming machine at power-on;
State information storage means (for example, an area of an address F002 of the RAM 102) capable of storing state information (for example, a RAM clear flag) capable of specifying a state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means;
With
The game control means,
A first condition (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) including that the state of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) is satisfied. When the CPU 103 performs the initialization process (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the RAM clearing process shown in FIG. 9-21 (A)) for initializing the game information storage unit accompanied by the erasure of the game information. Executable,
A second condition (for example, when the clear switch is ON and the lock switch is ON) including that the state of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON), the setting change process for changing the set value can be executed, and the initial process executed when the first condition is satisfied is performed. Initialization processing common to the initialization processing based on the state information stored in the state information storage means (for example, a part capable of executing the RAM clear processing and the set value change processing),
Regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the state information is not erased (for example, the RAM clear flag is cleared in the RAM clear processing as shown in FIG. 9-21 (A)). Part not to do)
According to this feature, the initialization process can be shared between the time when the first condition is satisfied and the time when the second condition is satisfied. The initialization process based on the state information can be accurately executed while preventing the storage capacity of the processing program from increasing.

Further, the present embodiment also includes the following invention 208SG. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there has been a problem that occurrence of a predetermined error in the setting state cannot be suitably left. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine according to Means 1 of Invention 208SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting value changing process shown in FIG. 9-22) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
An information display unit (for example, game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Section 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the setting value by the setting unit is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which setting can be performed (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is performing the setting value changing process illustrated in FIG. 9-22).
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of specifying that the predetermined error has occurred is performed in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (B)). In the case where an error occurs above the set value, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B blink.
According to this feature, a predetermined error occurs in a variable display area in which a variable display that is an important display is executed in the gaming machine even when a specific condition is satisfied. Since the notification is made by the display, the fact that the specific condition has been satisfied but a predetermined error has occurred can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in Means 2 of Invention 208SG,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined error is at least an error relating to a storage area in which the set value is stored (for example, an error equal to or more than a set value). Can be suitably notified that an error has occurred in the storage area in which is stored and that the setting values need to be reset.

Further, as a gaming machine according to Means 3 of Invention 208SG,
If a power failure occurs before a new set value changed in the setting state is determined, an error relating to the storage area storing the set value has occurred at the time of recovery from the power failure. Even if the setting is not made, a display capable of specifying that an error has occurred is performed in the variable display area (for example, even if the power is restored from the power interruption during the setting change as shown in FIG. 9-27 (B), the first display is performed). (A part for blinking all segments constituting the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, it is necessary to reset the set value without a new error due to the occurrence of a power interruption before the set value is determined without a new error Can be suitably notified.

The present embodiment also includes the following invention 209SG. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a pachinko gaming machine provided with information display means capable of displaying predetermined information relating to a given game value, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent No. 6220953. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 62209533 is applied to a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a display unit and an information display means for confirming set values are provided. However, there is a problem that the cost of the gaming machine cannot be reduced when the game machines are provided separately. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in Means 1 of Invention 209SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine that can play a game using a game medium and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting value changing process shown in FIG. 9-22) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
Game value providing means for providing a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc.). Part where the prize ball is paid out) and
It has a plurality of display units (for example, a first display unit 207SG029A to a fourth display unit 207SG029D), and has predetermined information (for example, a base shown in FIG. 9-17 (C)) related to a game value provided by the game value providing unit. Information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying
With
The information display means can display set value information that can specify a set value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-25, a pachinko game When the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, a part where the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state)
The number of the display units used is different between the case where the predetermined information is displayed and the case where the set value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-25, when the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029). When displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used. The part where only 207SG029D is used)
According to this feature, since the setting value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying predetermined information relating to the game value, a display means for displaying the setting value information is provided. There is no need to provide the gaming machine separately, and the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 2 of Invention 209SG,
The information display means can display error information that can specify that an error has occurred in at least a storage area in which the setting value is stored (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (B), When a setting value error has occurred, “E.” is displayed in the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D).
The number of the display units used is the same between when the predetermined information is displayed and when the error information is displayed (for example, FIG. 9-25 (A) and FIG. 9-26 (B)). As shown in the figure, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display both show the case where the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 and the case where an abnormal error is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029. (A part using the unit 207SG029D). According to this feature, it is possible to notify that an error has occurred in the storage area in which the set value is stored, and to provide the set value information and Can be easily recognized as different error information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 3 of Invention 209SG,
The display unit includes a plurality of small display units that can be turned on independently (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D each have 8 display units). Segment),
Equipped with detecting means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting a state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on,
The information display means, when the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means satisfies an initialization condition (for example, a clear switch is ON), the small display constituting each display unit. The whole display state is achieved in which all the display units are turned on (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (A), the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, the fourth display unit (A portion where all the segments of the 207SG029D are repeatedly turned on and off)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it can be confirmed whether or not all the small display portions are normal.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 4 of Invention 209SG,
Equipped with detecting means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting a state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on,
When the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection unit satisfies the predetermined condition, the information display unit displays the set value information without being in the all-lit display state (for example, As shown in FIG. 9-22, when the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process, after executing 207SGSa015 and 207SGSa016, the 207SGSa28 to 207SGSa030 are executed, and the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029.
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to quickly confirm a set value.

The present embodiment also includes the following invention 210SG. In other words, there is a conventional pachinko gaming machine that executes a check operation of a movable body based on a change operation of a set value, for example, one described in JP-A-2017-189349. However, in the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189349, if the operation of checking the movable body is performed while the set value is being changed, the worker may miss the operation. Therefore, it is conceivable that the confirmation operation is performed again after the end of the operation of changing the set value. In this case, if the operation of changing the set value is completed during the first operation of confirming the movable body, the operation is terminated. The operation of confirming a new movable body is started from the timing described above, and there is a problem that the movable body may perform an unintended operation. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine according to Means 1 of Invention 210SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
An operably provided movable body (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322);
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process);
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting value changing process shown in FIG. 9-22) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
When a specific condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a setting state in which the setting unit can set a setting value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, a clear switch, a lock switch, 207SG051, when the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, respectively, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value change processing),
The control means includes:
Confirmation operation control (for example, actual operation confirmation operation control) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can normally operate is performed when the state is shifted to the set state. It can be executed when the setting state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-35, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command from the timing at which the effect is received). A portion for sequentially executing the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the operation confirmation operation control, and the actual operation from the timing of receiving the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command A part for sequentially executing the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing including the confirmation operation control),
When the setting state is ended while the movable body is performing the checking operation by the checking operation control when shifting to the setting state, the checking operation control based on the end of the setting state is not executed (for example, As shown in FIG. 9-35 (C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command, If the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. Part where the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not performed)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 2 of Invention 210SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
An operably provided movable body (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322);
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process);
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting value changing process shown in FIG. 9-22) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cleared when it is started). When the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation processing);
The control means includes:
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization processing and second movable body initialization processing) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body is normally operable. It can be executed when the state is shifted to the confirmation state and when the confirmation state is ended (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-35, the effect control CPU 120 A part for sequentially executing the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing of receiving the start notification command, a set value change end notification command and a set value confirmation A part for sequentially executing the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing of receiving the end notification command),
If the confirmation state ends when the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the state is shifted to the confirmation state, the confirmation operation control based on the termination of the confirmation state is not performed (for example, As shown in FIG. 9-35 (C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command, When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. Part where the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not performed)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 3 of Invention 210SG,
The control means includes:
When the movable body is not located at the predetermined origin position, the return operation control (for example, non-detection operation control) for performing a return operation for positioning the movable body at the origin position is performed by the confirmation operation. Executable before performing the control,
When the setting state or the confirmation state ends during the return operation, the confirmation operation control is performed after the return operation ends (for example, a first movable body initialization process or a second movable body initialization process). In which the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed after the non-detection self-operation control is completed)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 4 of Invention 210SG,
The control unit is configured to, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation, set the state or the setting state when the operation state of the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition. The confirmation operation control based on the completion of the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (C), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command). If the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the first movable body initialization process based on the first movable body initialization process, the first movable body initialization is newly performed after the execution of the second movable body initialization process. Where the processing or the second movable body initialization processing is not performed) On the other hand, if the operation state of the confirmation operation does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the confirmation by the completion of the setting state or the confirmation state is performed. Operation control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (B), the first movable body initialization based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command). When the processing is completed and a set value change notification command or a set value confirmation notification command is received during execution of the second movable body initialization processing, a new first movable body is provided after the end of the second movable body initialization processing. A part for sequentially executing the initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be performed again according to the operation state of the confirmation operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 5 of Invention 210SG,
Comprising a plurality of the movable bodies,
The control means includes:
The confirmation operation control can be sequentially performed for each of the movable bodies (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 sequentially executes a first face transmission initialization process and a second movable body initialization process),
If the setting state or the confirmation state is completed when the confirmation operation is not completed for all of the movable bodies, if the number of the movable bodies that have completed the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition, The confirmation operation control based on the completion of the setting state or the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (C), the effect control CPU 120 transmits the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command. When a set value change end notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the first movable body initialization process based on the reception of the first movable body initialization process, the first movable body initialization process is newly performed after the execution of the second movable body initialization process. (A part where the movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not executed) The confirmation operation control based on the completion of the confirmation state is executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (B), the effect control CPU 120 transmits the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation). If the first movable body initialization process based on the reception of the start notification command is completed, and a set value change notification command or a set value confirmation notification command is received during execution of the second movable body initialization process, (2) A part in which the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are newly executed in order after the end of the movable body initialization processing)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be performed again according to the operation state of the confirmation operation.

  As above, the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment has been described with reference to the drawings. Included in the invention.

  For example, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the game information display portion 207SG200 is provided with the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display device 207SG025A, the second hold display device 207SG025B, Although the form which comprised the symbol display 207SG020, the general figure hold | maintenance display 207SG025C, the round display 207SG131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the probable change lamp 207SG133, and the time reduction lamp 207SG134 was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this. The game information display unit 207SG200 may include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B without including them.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether the CPU 103 is executing the set value changing process (set value changing state) or is executing the set value checking process (set value checking state). Although the mode in which the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on in the same mode has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is performing the setting value changing process. The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be lit or blinked in different modes depending on whether there is a setting value confirmation process. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set in either the set value change state or the set value confirmation state by the lighting mode or the flashing mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. You can easily tell if there is.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, all the segments configuring the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on, and The display mode (lighting mode) of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result. Although the form of making the difference is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode (lighting) of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state is described. Aspect) is the first special symbol display device 207S If the display mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004B or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is different from the display mode when the variable display result is derived and displayed, of the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. It is not necessary to light some segments.

  Further, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, all the segments and the round display unit 207SG131, which are composed of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, are configured in the characteristic value 207SG of the embodiment. Illustrated is a mode in which one segment is turned on, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and all the segments constituting the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B blink, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, one segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is turned on, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 blinks, and the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B are configured. Of all segments The dark, not executed, or may be executed only partially.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, only one of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is turned on. Is not limited to this. If the combination does not correspond to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 9-6, the number of lighting of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state is plural. There may be.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, an example in which the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are used to execute the notification of the set value abnormality error has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, an LED for error notification may be separately provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the LED may be turned on or off to notify that a set value error has occurred.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above embodiment, the form in which the display monitor 207SG029 for displaying the base value is displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The machine 1 may not include the display monitor 207SG029. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not include the display monitor 207SG029, a new display means for displaying the set value (or the provisional set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state may be newly provided. .

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, when the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization processing or the second movable body initialization processing, the first movable body A new first movable body initialization process or a second movable body initialization process is performed depending on whether the initialization process is being performed, that is, whether the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed. Although the form for determining whether to execute is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and whether to execute a new first movable body initialization process or a second movable body initialization process is determined by: The determination may be made according to the operating distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, and the like.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reservation display device 207SG025A, the second reservation display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display portion 207SG200, The form in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state by setting the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed ramp 207SG132, and the like in a mode different from that during the game has been described. Is not limited to this, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display device 207SG025A, the second hold display device 207SG025B, the round display that constitutes the game information display unit 207SG200 Vessel 2 7SG0131, the like right-handed lamp 207SG132, may have a structure in which pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in the notification if during the game that the setting value is changed status and settings confirmation state (lit or flashing).

  Also, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reservation display device 207SG025A, the second reservation display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display portion 207SG200, The form in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state by setting the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed ramp 207SG132, and the like in a mode different from that during the game has been described. Is not limited to this, and the “different mode from during the game” may include a different blinking cycle, a different luminance, a different emission color of each segment, and the like.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization are performed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command. As the processing, the form in which the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body are executed has been exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. From the time when the command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received, the operation control at the time of non-detection of each movable body is executed. Alternatively, actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body may be executed.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reservation display device 207SG025A, the second reservation display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display portion 207SG200, The form in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state by turning on or blinking the round display 207 SG 131 and the right strike lamp 207 SG 132 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reservation display device 207SG025A, the second suspension display device 207SG025B, Lau De indicator 207SG131, may be provided with written description of the lighting or blinking of the right-handed light 207SG132 is executed at a predetermined position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (e.g., the vicinity of the gaming information display unit 207SG200). By doing so, a clerk at a game hall or the like who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1 can use the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reservation display device 207SG025A, the second reservation. Lighting or blinking of the display 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 can be prevented from being erroneously recognized as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the game control main process of the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the setting value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the form in which the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Is not the case where the clear switch is determined to be ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the case where it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014, not after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021 (20). SGSa014; Y) to be executed.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 10F)
Next, the characteristic portion 10F will be described. The characteristic portion 10F is characterized in that a game stop start process and a game stop end process are added to the above-described set value change process and set value confirmation process.

  FIG. 10A is a flowchart illustrating the setting value changing process in the characteristic unit 10F. 10A, the same processes as those in FIGS. 9-22 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the processing of FIGS. 9-20, the RAM clear processing was executed in the processing of 207SGa009 before the setting change processing (207SGa013b) was executed. Therefore, at the stage of the setting change process (207SGa013b), no information regarding the game remains in the storage area. However, the RAM clear processing (207SGa009) may be executed when it is determined in 207SGSa014 that the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y). Thus, the RAM clearing process is performed after the setting change process. The description will be made on the assumption that the RAM clearing process is executed after the setting change process in the characteristic portion 10F. In the setting value changing process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). The details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. After the game stop start processing, lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is started (207SGSa051). Thereafter, processing similar to the processing shown in FIGS. 9 to 22 is executed.

  Further, the CPU 103 executes a game stop end process (10FS002) after executing the process of clearing the set value changing flag (207SGSa066). The details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. After the game stop ending process, the display of the set value (or the temporary set value) on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa067). Thereafter, processing similar to the processing shown in FIGS. 9 to 22 is executed.

  FIG. 10B is a flowchart illustrating the setting value confirmation processing in the characteristic unit 10F. In FIG. 10B, the same processes as those in FIGS. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). The details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. This game stop start process is a process common to the game stop start process of FIG. After the game stop start processing, lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is started (207SGSa101). Thereafter, processing similar to the processing shown in FIGS. 9 to 23 is executed.

  Further, when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in the 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the CPU 103 executes a game stop end process (10FS002). The details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. This game stop ending process is a process common to the game stop ending process of FIG. 10A. After the game stop ending process, the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa112). Thereafter, processing similar to the processing shown in FIGS. 9 to 23 is executed.

(About various timers)
Next, a game stop start process will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers measure the time and period related to the game. The CPU 103 stops counting the timers when the game is stopped. The plurality of timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 having a special winning opening. The CPU 103 measures the time from the opening of the special winning opening door to the closing state by the attacker opening time timer. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for measuring an interval period between rounds during the jackpot game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the end of a round to the start of the next round by using an interval timer between rounds.

  The V-cover opening time timer is a predetermined switch (V) in a V-variable game machine that controls the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probable state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7. This is a timer that is provided in front of a sensor that detects a V change and measures the opening time of the V lid that is controlled between the open state and the closed state. In a gaming machine with a variable V, the V lid is opened in a predetermined round of a plurality of rounds. Such an area where the V lid is open is referred to as a V winning area. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the V lid is opened to when it is closed by the V lid open time timer. The V passage waiting time timer is a timer for measuring a V winning time for determining that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103 determines whether the game ball that passed through the predetermined switch with a delay after the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 has been changed from the open state to the closed state (wins in the large winning opening immediately before the closing of the large winning opening door, and enters a predetermined position). A game ball that has passed through the switch is also determined to be V-win within the validity period. The CPU 103 counts the valid period of the V winning in which the V winning is determined to be valid by the V passing waiting time timer.

  The electric tue opening time timer is a timer that measures the opening time when the electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wings, which is the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory), is controlled to be in an open state. . The variable prize ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, but the CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable prize ball device 6B is opened to when the variable prize ball device 6B is closed, using an electric-chu open time timer. .

  The special figure variable time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by using the special symbol variable time timer. The ordinary figure variable time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of variable display of ordinary symbols. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the ordinary symbol to the end of the variable display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary variable time timer.

  The fanfare time timer is a timer that measures a period during which a fanfare effect is executed, which is a period for notifying that a big hit is controlled at the start of the big hit. The fanfare period is a period in which after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, a fanfare effect as an effect operation for notifying the start of the big hit gaming state is executed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect by the fanfare time timer.

  The ending time timer is a timer that measures a period during which the ending effect, which is a period for notifying the end of the big hit at the end of the big hit, is executed. The ending period is a period in which the big hit end process is executed, and a ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state is executed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

  The CPU 103 includes, as other timers other than the above-described timer, a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a general figure fluctuation stop period timer, and the like. The special figure fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures a time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed until the next variable display of the special symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from the time when the special symbol variable display is derived and displayed by the special symbol fluctuation stop period timer to the time when the next special symbol variable display is started. The ordinary figure fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures a time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from the time when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is derived and displayed, the time when the next variable display of the ordinary symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from the time when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is derived and displayed by the ordinary symbol fluctuation stop period timer to the time when the next variable display of the ordinary symbol is started.

(Game stop start processing)
Next, a game stop start process in the characteristic unit 10F will be described. FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing a game stop start process in the characteristic unit 10F. First, in the game stop start process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is operating (10FS010). In 10FS010, if the attacker release time timer is operating (10FS010; Y), the active attacker release time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the attacker release time timer is not in operation (10FS010; N), it is determined whether or not the inter-round interval timer is in operation (10FS011). In 10FS011, if the inter-round interval timer is operating (10FS011; Y), the operating inter-round interval timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

  If the interval timer between rounds is not operating (10FS011; N), it is determined whether or not the V lid opening time timer is operating (10FS012). In 10FS012, if the V-lid opening time timer is operating (10FS012; Y), the operating V-lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the V lid opening time timer is not operating (10FS012; N), it is determined whether the V passage waiting time timer is operating (10FS013). In 10FS013, if the V passage waiting time timer is operating (10FS013; Y), the operating V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

  If the V passage waiting time timer is not operating (10FS013; N), it is determined whether or not the electric tube opening time timer is operating (10FS014). In 10FS014, if the electric-chu opening time timer is operating (10FS014; Y), the operating electric-chu opening time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the electric tube opening time timer is not operating (10FS014; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure variable time timer is operating (10FS015). In 10FS015, if the special figure variable time timer is operating (10FS015; Y), the operating special figure variable time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

  If the special figure variable time timer is not operating (10FS015; N), it is determined whether or not the ordinary figure variable time timer is operating (10FS016). In 10FS016, if the general-purpose variation time timer is operating (10FS016; Y), the operating general-purpose variation time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the normal variation time timer is not operating (10FS016; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017). In 10FS017, if the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017; Y), the operating fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

  If the fanfare time timer is not operating (10FS017; N), it is determined whether or not the ending time timer is operating (10FS018). In 10FS018, if the ending time timer is in operation (10FS018; Y), the ending time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not in operation (10FS018; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is operating as another timer (10FS019). In 10FS019, if other timers are operating (10FS019; Y), the other operating timers are stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the other timers are not operating (10FS019; N), the other processing (10FS021) is executed, and then the processing ends.

  Here, the other processing (10FS021) includes the following processing. For example, a process of disabling the firing of the hit ball operation handle 30, a process of disabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning opening 10, the out port, the passing gate 41, a process of disabling the detection of various errors, Processing to invalidate the payout of award balls is included. By the other process (10FS021), various processes are invalidated and the game is not executed normally.

(Game stop end processing)
Next, a game stop ending process in the characteristic unit 10F will be described. FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing the game stop ending process in the characteristic unit 10F. First, in the game stop end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is stopped (10FS030). In 10FS030, if the attacker release time timer is stopped (10FS030; Y), the stopped attacker release time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the attacker release time timer is not stopped (10FS030; N), it is determined whether or not the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031). In 10FS031, if the inter-round interval timer is stopped (10FS031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

  If the inter-round interval timer is not stopped (10FS031; N), it is determined whether or not the V lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS032). In 10FS032, if the V-lid open time timer is stopped (10FS032; Y), the stopped V-lid open time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the V lid opening time timer is not stopped (10FS032; N), it is determined whether the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033). In 10FS033, if the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033; Y), the stopped V passage waiting time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated.

  If the V passage waiting time timer is not stopped (10FS033; N), it is determined whether or not the electric tube opening time timer is stopped (10FS034). In 10FS034, if the electric-chu opening time timer is stopped (10FS034; Y), the operating electric-chu opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the electric-chu opening time timer is not stopped (10FS034; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure variable time timer is stopped (10FS035). In 10FS035, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035; Y), the stopped special figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated.

  If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS035; N), it is determined whether or not the ordinary figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036). In 10FS036, if the general-purpose variation time timer is stopped (10FS036; Y), the stopped general-purpose variation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the ordinary figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS036; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037). In 10FS037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated.

  If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (10FS037; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038). In 10FS038, if the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not stopped (10FS038; N), it is determined whether or not other timers such as the special figure fluctuation stop period timer are stopped (10FS039). In 10FS039, if the other timer is stopped (10FS039; Y), the other stopped timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the other timers are not stopped (10FS039; N), other processing (10FS041) is executed, and then the processing ends.

  Here, the other processing (10FS041) includes the following processing. For example, a process of enabling the firing of the hit ball operation handle 30, a process of enabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning opening 10, the out port, the passing gate 41, a process of enabling detection of various errors, The processing includes a process of validating the prize ball payout. By the other process (10FS041), various processes are validated, and the game is executed normally.

(About the effect of the feature)
As shown in FIG. 10-1 to FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 controls the period of the attacker release time timer based on the fact that the special variable prize ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while changing to the open state. Is stopped, and the timing of the attacker release time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state in the setting confirmation state is subtracted, and the game proceeds, so that the player proceeds. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 stops measuring the period of the inter-round interval timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, Based on the end, the timer for the period of the inter-round interval period timer is restarted. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game with the interval period between rounds being subtracted in the setting confirmation state. Can be.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 stops measuring the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and checks the setting. Based on the termination of the state, the counting of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the validity period of the V winning is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game proceeds. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 10-1 to FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 controls the validity period of the electric-chu opening time timer based on the fact that the variable winning sphere device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when in the open state. Is stopped, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the counting of the validity period of the electric tube opening time timer is restarted. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses when the variable prize ball device 6B is in a state where the variable prize ball device 6B can enter in the setting confirmation state, and the player becomes disadvantageous. Can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 10-1 to FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 counts the validity period of the special figure variable time timer based on the control of the special figure variable time timer when the special symbol variable display is being executed. Is stopped, and the counting of the valid period of the special figure variable time timer is restarted based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. With this configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game by performing the variable display of the special symbol in the setting confirmation state. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 10-1 to FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 measures the valid period of the ordinary figure variable time timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state during the variable display of the ordinary symbol. Is stopped, and the counting of the valid period of the general-purpose variable time timer is restarted based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game by executing the variable display of the normal symbol in the setting confirmation state. be able to.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 stops measuring the validity period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the setting has been controlled during the execution of the fanfare effect, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer is restarted. With this configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game by executing the fanfare effect in the setting confirmation state. .

  As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 stops measuring the validity period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the counting of the valid period of the ending time timer is restarted. With this configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game by executing the ending effect in the setting confirmation state. .

  As shown in FIG. 10-1 to FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 controls the special pattern based on the control of the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and before the next variable display is started. The measurement of the period of the fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and the measurement of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period during which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state. This can prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(About the modification of the characteristic part)
As described above, the characteristic portion 10F has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to the one shown in the present example, and even if there are changes and additions without departing from the gist of the present invention, the present invention will be described. included. Hereinafter, a modified example of the characteristic portion 10F will be described.
I do.

  The gaming machine (so-called first-type gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot game state based on the variable display results of special symbols and decorative symbols has been described. Gaming machines (so-called second-type gaming machines) that shift to a jackpot gaming state based on a gaming ball winning (V-winning) in a special winning opening (V-winning opening) in the inside, or a first and second type May be applied to a game machine (one type and two type mixing machine) that combines the above. When a start winning in the second starting winning opening is detected, a jackpot determination is executed, and when the result of the jackpot determination is obtained, the fluctuation display of the second special figure is executed to display the jackpot display result and the jackpot game A game control similar to a big hit based on a winning start to the first starting winning opening, such as being controlled to a state, is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the determination is not a big hit, the small hit determination is executed, and when the result of the small hit determination is made, the fluctuation display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result is obtained. The special variable winning prize ball device for small hitting is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When the game ball is received by the special variable winning ball device for small hit in the small hit game state, and the game ball enters the special winning opening (V region) and is detected by the predetermined switch, the variable for big hit is changed. The second-type big hit game control in which the big prize ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds to be in the big hit game state is executed by the CPU 103 of the microcomputer 100 for game control.

  In such a one-two type mixing machine, a small hitting time timer for measuring an effective period for judging that a game ball entering the special winning opening (V region) is effective may be provided. The CPU 103 determines that a game ball that has passed the predetermined switch with a delay after the special variable winning ball device has changed from the open state to the closed state by the small hitting time timer is also within the validity period. The CPU 103 uses the small hit time timer to time a period in which winning in the special winning opening is determined to be valid. Then, the CPU 103 stops measuring the validity period of the small hitting time timer based on the control of the setting checking state when the small hitting game state is set, and based on the termination of the setting checking state. Alternatively, the counting of the valid period of the small hit time timer may be restarted. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the control in the small hitting game state is executed in the setting confirmation state, and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, various controls are executed in the setting confirmation state. However, similar control may be executed in the setting change state as shown in FIGS. Good. For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of various timers based on being controlled to the setting change state when the player is in an advantageous state or the like, and based on the completion of the setting change state, various timers. May be restarted.

  The control of the timer may be changed between the case where the variable display of the special symbol is a big hit display result and the case where the special symbol is a loss display result. Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol is a big hit display result, the time of the special figure variable time timer is stopped based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. If the special figure variable time timer is restarted, and the variable display of the special symbol is a loss display result, the special figure variable time timer may not be stopped even if it is controlled to the setting confirmation state. . In this way, the timer is stopped to give a disadvantage to the player with respect to the jackpot display result which is in an advantageous state for the player, but the timer is stopped because the loss display result is not disadvantageous to the player. It can be prevented from stopping. As a control method, it is sufficient to determine whether the current gaming state is a big hit display result or a non-big hit display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. If the setting confirmation is performed during the execution of the variable display of the loss display result, the symbol stop period is reached without stopping the timing of the special figure variable time timer during the execution of the variable display of the loss. At this time, the special figure fluctuation stop period timer may be stopped.

  The control of the timer may be changed between a case where the setting value is advantageous for the player and a case where the setting value is disadvantageous for the player. For example, various timers are stopped when the setting is confirmed when the setting value is advantageous to the player, but various timers are stopped when the setting is confirmed when the setting value is disadvantageous to the player. You may not be stopped.

(Description of invention relating to feature portion 10F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 10F includes the following invention relating to the above-described characteristic portion 10F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of set values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on the set value. Was. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the setting value, the processing can be shifted to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

  However, in the case of a gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is necessary to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic portion 10F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part), and
State control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a setting change value confirmation process) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value has been set;
A variable prize device (for example, a special variable prize ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player;
A predetermined game execution means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times;
Variable prize timer means (for example, a CPU 103 which counts time by an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period for changing the variable prize apparatus to the first state,
The variable prize clocking means stops timing of a period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable prize apparatus is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 measures the time of the attacker release time timer based on the fact that the special variable prize ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable prize ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timing of the attacker release time timer is restarted based on the completion of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period in which the variable prize device changes to the first state in the setting confirmation state is subtracted, and the game proceeds, so that the player proceeds. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1),
A predetermined game timing means (for example, a CPU 103 for timing by a timer between rounds) for counting a period (for example, an interval between rounds) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game;
The predetermined game timing means stops the timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state is ended (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the period of the inter-round interval timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval, and ends the setting confirmation state. Based on the result, the timer of the interval between rounds is restarted.

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and in the setting confirmation state, the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game is subtracted, and the game progresses. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantaged.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and through which a game medium can enter;
A special state control unit (for example, CPU103) for controlling to a special state (for example, a probable change state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is increased based on the game medium entering the specific area;
A specific timing means (for example, a validity period of a V prize) for measuring a validity period (for example, a validity period of a V prize) for determining that a game medium entering the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a validity period of a V prize). For example, the CPU 103 further measures the time by a V passage waiting time timer.
The specific timekeeping means stops measuring the validity period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and measures the validity period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. The timer is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops measuring the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and terminates the setting confirmation state. To restart the counting of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the validity period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted, and the game proceeds, so that the player is disadvantaged. Can be prevented.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying ordinary identification information (for example, ordinary symbols) based on the fact that the game medium has entered a predetermined area (for example, passing gate 41) and for deriving and displaying a display result; ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per ordinary figure), the normal variable prize means (for example, open state) in which the game medium can enter (for example, open state) for a predetermined period of time (for example, , Variable winning ball device 6B),
A normal variable prize timer (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by an electric chew opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable prize is in a state where it can enter;
The normal variable prize counting means stops timing of a period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable prize means is in a state where the normal variable prize winning means can enter, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the validity period of the electric-chu opening time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. The timer is stopped, and based on the completion of the setting confirmation state, the timer for the valid period of the electric tue opening time timer is restarted.)

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses when the normally variable winning means is in a state where the normal variable prize winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state, so that the player is disadvantageously disadvantageous. Can be prevented.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4),
It performs variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) and is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, big hit game state) when a specific display result (for example, big hit display result) is derived,
A variable display timing unit (for example, the CPU 103 that counts the time by using a special figure variable time timer) that counts the execution period of the variable display of the identification information;
The variable display clocking means stops time counting based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being performed, and performs a period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the valid period of the special figure variable time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. Based on the end of the state, the counting of the valid period of the special figure variable time timer is restarted).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately perform the setting check, and it is possible that the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting check state and the game progresses, thereby giving a disadvantage to the player. Can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (5),
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying ordinary identification information (for example, ordinary symbols) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41) and deriving a display result;
A normal variable display timer (for example, a CPU 103 that measures time using a general-purpose variable time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information;
The ordinary variable display timing means stops time measurement based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of ordinary identification information is being executed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the ordinary figure variable time timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the counting of the valid period of the general-purpose variable time timer is restarted).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and in the setting confirmation state, the variable display of the normal identification information is executed and the game progresses, thereby causing a disadvantage to the player. Can be prevented.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6),
Start notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
A start notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that counts time by a fanfare time timer) that counts an execution period of the start notification effect;
The start notification effect timing means stops the timing of a period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and sets a period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops measuring the validity period of the fanfare time timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being performed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is prevented that the player is disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (7),
An end notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) for notifying the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
Further comprising an end notification effect timing means (for example, the CPU 103 timing by an ending time timer) for timing the execution period of the end notification effect,
The end notification effect timing means stops the timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and determines the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops measuring the validity period of the ending time timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being performed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the counting of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the end notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (8),
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, small hitting game state) based on the fact that the variable display result becomes a special display result (for example, small hit display result);
A special prize device (for example, a special variable prize ball device) that allows game media to enter in the special state,
A special area (e.g., a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and through which game media can enter;
The advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is controlled based on the game medium having entered the special area,
Special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that counts a small hit time timer) that counts an effective period for determining that a game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid,
The special timekeeping means stops measuring the validity period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the measurement of the validity period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, The CPU 103 stops measuring the validity period of the small hitting time timer based on being controlled to the setting check state when the small hitting game state is set, and based on the fact that the setting checking state has ended, Restart the timing of the effective period of the small hit time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be checked immediately, and the control in the special state is executed in the setting checking state, so that the game progresses and the player is disadvantaged. Can be prevented.

(Description of the invention relating to the characteristic portion 11F)
The invention described below may be included as the characteristic portion 11F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of set values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on the set value. Was. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the setting value, the processing can be shifted to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

  However, in the case of a gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is necessary to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic portion 11F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part), and
State control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a setting change value confirmation process) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value has been set;
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying ordinary identification information (for example, ordinary symbols) based on the fact that the game medium has entered a predetermined area (for example, passing gate 41) and for deriving and displaying a display result; ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per ordinary figure), the normal variable prize means (for example, open state) in which the game medium can enter (for example, open state) for a predetermined period of time (for example, , Variable winning ball device 6B),
Normal variable prize timer means (for example, a CPU 103 which counts time by an electric chew opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable prize means can enter.
The normal variable prize counting means stops timing of a period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable prize means is in a state where the normal variable prize winning means can enter, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the validity period of the electric-chu opening time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. The timer is stopped, and based on the completion of the setting confirmation state, the timer for the valid period of the electric tue opening time timer is restarted.)

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses when the normally variable winning means is in a state where the normal variable prize winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state, so that the player is disadvantageously disadvantageous. Can be prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1),
A variable prize device (for example, a special variable prize ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player;
A predetermined game execution means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times;
Variable prize timer means (for example, a CPU 103 for clocking with an attacker release time timer) for measuring a period for changing the variable prize apparatus to the first state,
The variable prize clocking means stops timing of a period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable prize apparatus is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 measures the time of the attacker release time timer based on the fact that the special variable prize ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable prize ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timing of the attacker release time timer is restarted based on the completion of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period in which the variable prize device changes to the first state in the setting confirmation state is subtracted, and the game proceeds, so that the player proceeds. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (2),
A predetermined game timing means (for example, a CPU 103 for timing by a timer between rounds) for counting a period (for example, an interval between rounds) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game;
The predetermined game timing means stops the timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state is ended (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the period of the inter-round interval timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval, and ends the setting confirmation state. Based on the result, the timer of the interval between rounds is restarted.

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and in the setting confirmation state, the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game is subtracted, and the game progresses. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantaged.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) or (3),
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and through which a game medium can enter;
A special state control unit (for example, CPU103) for controlling to a special state (for example, a probable change state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is increased based on the game medium entering the specific area;
A specific timing means (for example, a validity period of a V prize) for measuring a validity period (for example, a validity period of a V prize) for determining that a game medium entering the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a validity period of a V prize). For example, the CPU 103 further measures the time by a V passage waiting time timer.
The specific timekeeping means stops measuring the validity period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and measures the validity period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. The timer is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops measuring the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and terminates the setting confirmation state. To restart the counting of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the validity period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted, and the game proceeds, so that the player is disadvantaged. Can be prevented.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4),
It performs variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) and is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, big hit game state) when a specific display result (for example, big hit display result) is derived,
A variable display timing unit (for example, the CPU 103 that counts the time by using a special figure variable time timer) that counts the execution period of the variable display of the identification information;
The variable display clocking means stops time counting based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being performed, and performs a period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the valid period of the special figure variable time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. Based on the end of the state, the counting of the valid period of the special figure variable time timer is restarted).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately perform the setting check, and it is possible that the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting check state and the game progresses, thereby giving a disadvantage to the player. Can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (5),
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying ordinary identification information (for example, ordinary symbols) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41) and deriving a display result;
A normal variable display timer (for example, a CPU 103 that measures time using a general-purpose variable time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information;
The ordinary variable display timing means stops time measurement based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of ordinary identification information is being executed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the ordinary figure variable time timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the counting of the valid period of the general-purpose variable time timer is restarted).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and in the setting confirmation state, the variable display of the normal identification information is executed and the game progresses, thereby causing a disadvantage to the player. Can be prevented.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6),
Start notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
A start notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that counts time by a fanfare time timer) that counts an execution period of the start notification effect;
The start notification effect timing means stops the timing of a period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and sets a period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops measuring the validity period of the fanfare time timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being performed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is prevented that the player is disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (7),
An end notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) for notifying the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
Further comprising an end notification effect timing means (for example, the CPU 103 timing by an ending time timer) for timing the execution period of the end notification effect,
The end notification effect timing means stops the timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and determines the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops measuring the validity period of the ending time timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being performed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the counting of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the end notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (8),
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, small hitting game state) based on the fact that the variable display result becomes a special display result (for example, small hit display result);
A special prize device (for example, a special variable prize ball device) that allows game media to enter in the special state,
A special area (e.g., a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and through which game media can enter;
The advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is controlled based on the game medium having entered the special area,
Special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that counts a small hit time timer) that counts an effective period for determining that a game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid,
The special timekeeping means stops measuring the validity period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the measurement of the validity period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, The CPU 103 stops measuring the validity period of the small hitting time timer based on being controlled to the setting check state when the small hitting game state is set, and based on the fact that the setting checking state has ended, Restart the timing of the effective period of the small hit time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be checked immediately, and the control in the special state is executed in the setting checking state, so that the game progresses and the player is disadvantaged. Can be prevented.

(Description of the invention relating to the characteristic portion 12F)
The invention described below may be included as the characteristic portion 12F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of set values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on the set value. Was. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the setting value, the processing can be shifted to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

  However, in the case of a gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is necessary to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic portion 12F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player when the specific display is derived as a result. hand,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part), and
State control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a setting change value confirmation process) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value has been set;
Variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 for timing by a special figure variable time timer) for timing an execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, a special symbol);
The variable display clocking means stops time counting based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being performed, and performs a period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the valid period of the special figure variable time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. Based on the end of the state, the counting of the valid period of the special figure variable time timer is restarted).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately perform the setting check, and it is possible that the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting check state and the game progresses, thereby giving a disadvantage to the player. Can be prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1),
A variable prize device (for example, a special variable prize ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player;
A predetermined game execution means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times;
Variable prize timer means (for example, a CPU 103 for clocking with an attacker release time timer) for measuring a period for changing the variable prize apparatus to the first state,
The variable prize clocking means stops timing of a period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable prize apparatus is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 measures the time of the attacker release time timer based on the fact that the special variable prize ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable prize ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timing of the attacker release time timer is restarted based on the completion of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period in which the variable prize device changes to the first state in the setting confirmation state is subtracted, and the game proceeds, so that the player proceeds. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
Further provided is a stop timing means (for example, the CPU 103 timing by a special figure variable stop period timer) for counting a period from the stop of the variable display of the identification information to the start of the next variable display,
The stop timing means stops the timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the identification information is stopped and before the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state The timing of the period is restarted on the basis of the end (for example, the CPU 103 performs the special control based on the control of the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and before the next variable display is started). The timing of the period of the figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and the time measurement of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the completion of the setting confirmation state.)

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted, and the game proceeds. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to this.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
A predetermined game timing means (for example, a CPU 103 for timing by a timer between rounds) for counting a period (for example, an interval between rounds) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game;
The predetermined game timing means stops the timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state is ended (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the period of the inter-round interval timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval, and ends the setting confirmation state. Based on the result, the timer of the interval between rounds is restarted.

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and in the setting confirmation state, the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game is subtracted, and the game progresses. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantaged.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (2) to (4),
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and through which a game medium can enter;
A special state control unit (for example, CPU103) for controlling to a special state (for example, a probable change state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is increased based on the game medium entering the specific area;
A specific timing means (for example, a validity period of a V prize) for measuring a validity period (for example, a validity period of a V prize) for determining that a game medium entering the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a validity period of a V prize). For example, the CPU 103 further measures the time by a V passage waiting time timer.
The specific timekeeping means stops measuring the validity period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and measures the validity period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. The timer is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops measuring the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and terminates the setting confirmation state. To restart the counting of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the validity period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted, and the game proceeds, so that the player is disadvantaged. Can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (5),
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying ordinary identification information (for example, ordinary symbols) based on the fact that the game medium has entered a predetermined area (for example, passing gate 41) and for deriving and displaying a display result; ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per ordinary figure), the normal variable prize means (for example, open state) in which the game medium can enter (for example, open state) for a predetermined period of time (for example, , Variable winning ball device 6B),
A normal variable prize timer (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by an electric chew opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable prize is in a state where it can enter;
The normal variable prize counting means stops timing of a period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable prize means is in a state where the normal variable prize winning means can enter, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the validity period of the electric-chu opening time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. The timer is stopped, and based on the completion of the setting confirmation state, the timer for the valid period of the electric tue opening time timer is restarted.)

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses when the normally variable winning means is in a state where the normal variable prize winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state, so that the player is disadvantageously disadvantageous. Can be prevented.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6),
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying ordinary identification information (for example, ordinary symbols) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41) and deriving a display result;
A normal variable display timer (for example, a CPU 103 that measures time using a general-purpose variable time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information;
The ordinary variable display timing means stops time measurement based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of ordinary identification information is being executed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the ordinary figure variable time timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the counting of the valid period of the general-purpose variable time timer is restarted).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and in the setting confirmation state, the variable display of the normal identification information is executed and the game progresses, thereby causing a disadvantage to the player. Can be prevented.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (7),
Start notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
A start notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that counts time by a fanfare time timer) that counts an execution period of the start notification effect;
The start notification effect timing means stops the timing of a period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and sets a period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops measuring the validity period of the fanfare time timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being performed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is prevented that the player is disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (8),
An end notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) for notifying the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
Further comprising an end notification effect timing means (for example, the CPU 103 timing by an ending time timer) for timing the execution period of the end notification effect,
The end notification effect timing means stops the timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and determines the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops measuring the validity period of the ending time timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being performed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the counting of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the end notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (9),
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, small hitting game state) based on the fact that the variable display result becomes a special display result (for example, small hit display result);
A special prize device (for example, a special variable prize ball device) that allows game media to enter in the special state,
A special area (e.g., a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and through which game media can enter;
The advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is controlled based on the game medium having entered the special area,
Special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that counts a small hit time timer) that counts an effective period for determining that a game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid,
The special timekeeping means stops measuring the validity period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the measurement of the validity period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, The CPU 103 stops measuring the validity period of the small hitting time timer based on being controlled to the setting check state when the small hitting game state is set, and based on the fact that the setting checking state has ended, Restart the timing of the effective period of the small hit time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be checked immediately, and the control in the special state is executed in the setting checking state, so that the game progresses and the player is disadvantaged. Can be prevented.

(Description of invention relating to feature portion 13F)
The invention described below may be included as the characteristic portion 13F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of set values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on the set value. Was. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the setting value, the processing can be shifted to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

  However, in the case of a gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is necessary to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic portion 13F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player when a specific display result is derived. ,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part), and
State control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a setting change value confirmation process) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value has been set;
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying ordinary identification information (for example, ordinary symbols) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41) and deriving a display result;
A normal variable display clocking means (for example, a CPU 103 for clocking by a general-purpose variable time timer) for clocking the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information;
The ordinary variable display timing means stops time measurement based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of ordinary identification information is being executed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the ordinary figure variable time timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the counting of the valid period of the general-purpose variable time timer is restarted).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and in the setting confirmation state, the variable display of the normal identification information is executed and the game progresses, thereby causing a disadvantage to the player. Can be prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1),
A variable prize device (for example, a special variable prize ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player;
A predetermined game execution means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times;
Variable prize timer means (for example, a CPU 103 for clocking with an attacker release time timer) for measuring a period for changing the variable prize apparatus to the first state,
The variable prize clocking means stops timing of a period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable prize apparatus is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 measures the time of the attacker release time timer based on the fact that the special variable prize ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable prize ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timing of the attacker release time timer is restarted based on the completion of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period in which the variable prize device changes to the first state in the setting confirmation state is subtracted, and the game proceeds, so that the player proceeds. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
Further provided is a stop timing means (for example, the CPU 103 timing by a special figure variable stop period timer) for counting a period from the stop of the variable display of the identification information to the start of the next variable display,
The stop timing means stops the timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the identification information is stopped and before the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state The timing of the period is restarted on the basis of the end (for example, the CPU 103 performs the special control based on the control of the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and before the next variable display is started). The timing of the period of the figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and the time measurement of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the completion of the setting confirmation state.)

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted, and the game proceeds. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to this.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
A predetermined game timing means (for example, a CPU 103 for timing by a timer between rounds) for counting a period (for example, an interval between rounds) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game;
The predetermined game timing means stops the timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state is ended (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the period of the inter-round interval timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval, and ends the setting confirmation state. Based on the result, the timer of the interval between rounds is restarted.

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and in the setting confirmation state, the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game is subtracted, and the game progresses. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantaged.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (2) to (4),
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and through which a game medium can enter;
A special state control unit (for example, CPU103) for controlling to a special state (for example, a probable change state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is increased based on the game medium entering the specific area;
A specific timing means (for example, a validity period of a V prize) for measuring a validity period (for example, a validity period of a V prize) for determining that a game medium entering the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a validity period of a V prize). For example, the CPU 103 further measures the time by a V passage waiting time timer.
The specific timekeeping means stops measuring the validity period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and measures the validity period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. The timer is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops measuring the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and terminates the setting confirmation state. To restart the counting of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the validity period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted, and the game proceeds, so that the player is disadvantaged. Can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (5),
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying ordinary identification information (for example, ordinary symbols) based on the fact that the game medium has entered a predetermined area (for example, passing gate 41) and for deriving and displaying a display result; ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per ordinary figure), the normal variable prize means (for example, open state) in which the game medium can enter (for example, open state) for a predetermined period of time (for example, , Variable winning ball device 6B),
A normal variable prize timer (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by an electric chew opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable prize is in a state where it can enter;
The normal variable prize counting means stops timing of a period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable prize means is in a state where the normal variable prize winning means can enter, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the validity period of the electric-chu opening time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. The timer is stopped, and based on the completion of the setting confirmation state, the timer for the valid period of the electric tue opening time timer is restarted.)

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses when the normally variable winning means is in a state where the normal variable prize winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state, so that the player is disadvantageously disadvantageous. Can be prevented.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6),
It performs variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) and is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, big hit game state) when a specific display result (for example, big hit display result) is derived,
A variable display timing unit (for example, the CPU 103 that counts the time by using a special figure variable time timer) that counts the execution period of the variable display of the identification information;
The variable display clocking means stops time counting based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being performed, and performs a period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the valid period of the special figure variable time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. Based on the end of the state, the counting of the valid period of the special figure variable time timer is restarted).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately perform the setting check, and it is possible that the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting check state and the game progresses, thereby giving a disadvantage to the player. Can be prevented.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (7),
Start notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
A start notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that counts time by a fanfare time timer) that counts an execution period of the start notification effect;
The start notification effect timing means stops the timing of a period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and sets a period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops measuring the validity period of the fanfare time timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being performed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is prevented that the player is disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (8),
An end notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) for notifying the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
Further comprising an end notification effect timing means (for example, the CPU 103 timing by an ending time timer) for timing the execution period of the end notification effect,
The end notification effect timing means stops the timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and determines the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops measuring the validity period of the ending time timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being performed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the counting of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the end notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (9),
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, small hitting game state) based on the fact that the variable display result becomes a special display result (for example, small hit display result);
A special prize device (for example, a special variable prize ball device) that allows game media to enter in the special state,
A special area (e.g., a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and through which game media can enter;
The advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is controlled based on the game medium having entered the special area,
Special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that counts a small hit time timer) that counts an effective period for determining that a game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid,
The special timekeeping means stops measuring the validity period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the measurement of the validity period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, The CPU 103 stops measuring the validity period of the small hitting time timer based on being controlled to the setting check state when the small hitting game state is set, and based on the fact that the setting checking state has ended, Restart the timing of the effective period of the small hit time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be checked immediately, and the control in the special state is executed in the setting checking state, so that the game progresses and the player is disadvantaged. Can be prevented.

(Explanation related to association of features)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion may be appropriately combined with some or all of the configurations related to the other characteristic portions. The features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations related to other features as appropriate.

  The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  1 Pachinko gaming machine, 100 game control microcomputer, 120 effect control CPU, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player when a specific display result is derived,
Setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player;
State control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set,
Normal variable display means for performing variable display of normal identification information and deriving a display result based on that the game medium has passed the predetermined area,
Ordinary variable display timing means for timing the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information,
The ordinary variable display timer means, when controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the ordinary identification information, stops timing of the period until the setting confirmation state ends. A gaming machine that restarts time counting when the setting confirmation state ends .

Images